Operating Instructions
Control Relay
500, 700
05/10 MN05013003Z-EN
replaces 05/04 AWB2528-1508GB
All brand and product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the owner concerned.
Emergency On Call Service
Please call your local representative:
http://www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales
or
Hotline of the After Sales Service:
+49 (0) 180 5 223822 (de, en)
AfterSalesEGBonn@eaton.com
Original Operating Instructions
The German-language edition of this document is the
original operating manual.
Translation of the original operating manual
All editions of this document other than those in
German language are translations of the original
German manual.
1st published 2004, edition date 05/04,
2nd edition 05/10,
See revision protocol in the “About this manual“
chapter
© 2004 by Eaton Industries GmbH, 53105 Bonn
Production:DHW
Translation:globaldocs GmbH
All rights reserved, including those of the translation.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form
(printed, photocopy, microfilm or any other process) or
processed, duplicated or distributed by means of
electronic systems without written permission of
Eaton Industries GmbH, Bonn.
Subject to alteration without notice.
Rückenbreite festlegen! (1 Blatt = 0,106 mm, gilt nur für XBS)
(1 Blatt = 0,080 mm für Eberwein Digitaldruck bei 80 g/m2)
I
Before commencing the installation
• Disconnect the power supply of the device.
• Ensure that devices cannot be accidentally restarted.
• Verify isolation from the supply.
• Earth and short circuit.
• Cover or enclose neighbouring units that are live.
• Follow the engineering instructions (AWA) of the
device concerned.
• Only suitably qualified personnel in accordance with
EN 50110-1/-2 (VDE 0105 Part 100) may work on
this device/system.
• Before installation and before touching the device ensure
that you are free of electrostatic charge.
• The functional earth (FE) must be connected to the protective
earth (PE) or to the potential equalisation. The system installer
is responsible for implementing this connection.
• Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so
that inductive or capacitive interference does not impair the
automation functions.
• Install automation devices and related operating elements in
such a way that they are well protected against unintentional
operation.
• Suitable safety hardware and software measures should be
implemented for the I/O interface so that a line or wire
breakage on the signal side does not result in undefined
states in the automation devices.
• Ensure a reliable electrical isolation of the low voltage for the
24 volt supply. Only use power supply units complying with
IEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100 Part 410) or HD 384.4.41 S2.
• Deviations of the mains voltage from the rated value must
not exceed the tolerance limits given in the specifications,
otherwise this may cause malfunction and dangerous
operation.
• Emergency stop devices complying with IEC/EN 60204-1 must
be effective in all operating modes of the automation devices.
Unlatching the emergency-stop devices must not cause restart.
• Devices that are designed for mounting in housings or control
cabinets must only be operated and controlled after they have
been installed with the housing closed. Desktop or portable
units must only be operated and controlled in enclosed
housings.
• Measures should be taken to ensure the proper restart of
programs interrupted after a voltage dip or failure. This should
not cause dangerous operating states even for a short time.
If necessary, emergency-stop devices should be implemented.
• Wherever faults in the automation system may cause
damage to persons or property, external measures must be
implemented to ensure a safe operating state in the event of
a fault or malfunction (for example, by means of separate limit
switches, mechanical interlocks etc.).
Moeller GmbH
Safety instructions
Danger!
Dangerous electrical voltage!
II
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 1
Contents
0 About This Manual..................................................................... 7
0.1 List of revisions ............................................................................ 7
0.2 Device designation....................................................................... 7
0.3 Writing conventions ..................................................................... 8
1.............................................................................................. 9
1.1 Target group................................................................................. 9
1.2 Proper use.................................................................................... 9
1.2.1 Improper use................................................................................ 9
1.3 Overview...................................................................................... 10
1.4 Versions ....................................................................................... 12
1.4.1 Key to part numbers..................................................................... 14
1.5 operating principles ............................................................... 15
1.5.1 Key Pad ........................................................................................ 15
1.5.2 Selecting menus and entering values .......................................... 15
1.5.3 Choosing the main and system menu ......................................... 16
1.5.4 Status indicator .................................................................... 17
1.5.5 Status display for local expansion ................................................ 17
1.5.6 Advanced Status display .............................................................. 17
1.5.7 LED display ........................................................................... 18
1.5.8 Menu structure ............................................................................ 18
1.5.9 Selecting or toggling between menu items................................. 22
1.5.10 Cursor display............................................................................... 22
1.5.11 Set value ...................................................................................... 23
2 Installation .................................................................................. 25
2.1 Mounting...................................................................................... 26
2.1.1 Mounting on top-hat rail............................................................... 26
2.1.2 Screw mounting........................................................................... 27
2.2 Connecting the expansion device ................................................ 28
2.3 Terminations ................................................................................ 29
2.3.1 Tools............................................................................................. 29
2.3.2 Cable cross-sections .................................................................... 29
2.4 Connecting the power supply ...................................................... 29
2.4.1 Cable protection ........................................................................... 29
2.4.2 Supplying AC basic units.............................................................. 29
2.4.3 Supplying AC expansion units...................................................... 30
2.4.4 Supplying DC basic units.............................................................. 31
2.4.5 Supplying DC expansion devices ................................................. 31
2.5 Connecting inputs ........................................................................ 32
2.5.1 Connect digital AC inputs............................................................. 32
2.5.2 Connecting easy DC digital inputs ............................................... 36
2.5.3 Connecting analog inputs............................................................. 37
2.5.4 Connecting high-speed counters and frequency generators ....... 41
2Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.6 Connecting outputs...................................................................... 42
2.6.1 Connecting relay outputs............................................................. 42
2.6.2 Connecting transistor outputs...................................................... 44
2.6.3 Behavior in the event of a short-circuit/overload.......................... 46
2.7 Expanding inputs/outputs . .......................................................... 46
2.7.1 Local expansion module .............................................................. 47
2.7.2 Remote expansion....................................................................... 48
2.8 Connecting bus systems ............................................................. 49
3 Placing into operation ............................................................... 51
3.1 Switch-on..................................................................................... 51
3.2 Setting the menu language.......................................................... 51
3.3 operating modes ................................................................... 52
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram................................................ 52
3.4.1 Circuit diagram display................................................................. 54
3.4.2 From the first contact to the output coil ...................................... 55
3.4.3 Wiring .......................................................................................... 55
3.4.4 Testing the circuit diagram........................................................... 57
3.4.5 Deleting the circuit diagram......................................................... 58
3.4.6 Fast circuit diagram entry............................................................. 58
4 Wiring with ........................................................................ 59
4.1 -operation .............................................................................. 59
4.1.1 Buttons for editing circuit diagrams and function relays.............. 59
4.1.2 Operation ..................................................................................... 59
4.1.3 Relays, function relays................................................................. 63
4.1.4 Saving and loading circuit diagrams ............................................. 65
4.2 Working with contacts and relays................................................ 66
4.2.1 Input and output contacts............................................................ 66
4.2.2 Creating and modifying connections............................................ 68
4.2.3 Inserting and deleting a rung ....................................................... 69
4.2.4 Switching with the Cursor Buttons.............................................. 70
4.2.5 Checking the circuit diagram........................................................ 71
4.2.6 Coil Functions .............................................................................. 72
4.3 Function Relays............................................................................ 77
4.3.1 Example: with function relay timer and counter relay.................. 78
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch ........................ 82
4.4.1 Circuit diagram display with analog value comparator ................. 84
4.4.2 Compatibility with 400 with500 and 600 with
700 ........................................................................................ 84
4.4.3 Parameter display in RUN mode.................................................. 85
4.4.4 Resolution of the analog inputs ................................................... 86
4.4.5 Function of the analog value comparator function relay .............. 86
4.5 Counter ........................................................................................ 94
4.5.1 Function of the counter function relay......................................... 97
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC...................................... 100
4.6.1 Frequency Counter ...................................................................... 100
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 3
4.6.2 High-speed counters.................................................................... 103
4.7 Text Display.................................................................................. 109
4.7.1 Wiring a text display..................................................................... 109
4.7.2 Retention...................................................................................... 109
4.7.3 Scaling.......................................................................................... 110
4.7.4 Function ....................................................................................... 110
4.7.5 Text Entry..................................................................................... 111
4.7.6 Font .............................................................................................. 111
4.7.7 Entering a setpoint in a display .................................................... 111
4.8 Weekly timer................................................................................ 113
4.8.1 Parameter display and parameter set for weekly timer: .............. 114
4.8.2 Changing time switch channel ..................................................... 115
4.8.3 Function of the weekly timer (example parameter setting) ......... 115
4.9 Operating Hours Counter ............................................................. 118
4.9.1 Value range of the operating hours counter................................. 119
4.9.2 Accuracy of the operating hours counter..................................... 119
4.9.3 Function of the operating hours counter function relay ............... 119
4.10 Timing Relay................................................................................. 122
4.10.1 Parameter display and parameter set for a timing relay:.............. 123
4.10.2 Retention...................................................................................... 124
4.10.3 Timing relay modes...................................................................... 124
4.10.4 Time Range .................................................................................. 125
4.10.5 Function of the timing relay function relay................................... 127
4.10.6 Examples timing relay .................................................................. 132
4.11 Jumps .......................................................................................... 135
4.11.1 Function ....................................................................................... 135
4.11.2 Power Flow Display ..................................................................... 136
4.12 Year Time Switch ......................................................................... 137
4.12.1 Function ....................................................................................... 137
4.12.2 Behavior in the event of a power failure ...................................... 138
4.12.3 Wiring of a year time switch ........................................................ 138
4.12.4 Parameter display and parameter set for year time switch ......... 138
4.12.5 Changing time switch channel ..................................................... 139
4.12.6 Entry rules .................................................................................... 140
4.12.7 Function of the year time switch ................................................. 142
4.12.8 Year time switch for sample parameter configurations ............... 142
4.13 Master Reset ............................................................................... 147
4.13.1 Operating modes ......................................................................... 148
4.13.2 Function of the master reset function relay ................................. 148
4.14 Basic circuits ................................................................................ 149
4.14.1 Negation (contact) ........................................................................ 149
4.14.2 Negation (coil) .............................................................................. 149
4.14.3 Permanent contact....................................................................... 149
4.14.4 Series circuit................................................................................. 150
4.14.5 Parallel connection ....................................................................... 150
4.14.6 Parallel circuit operating like a series connection of make
contacts........................................................................................ 151
4Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.14.7 Parallel circuit operating like a series connection of break
contacts ....................................................................................... 152
4.14.8 Two way switch........................................................................... 152
4.14.9 Self maintaining ........................................................................... 153
4.14.10 Impulse relays.............................................................................. 154
4.14.11 Cycle pulse on rising edge........................................................... 154
4.14.12 Cycle pulse on falling edge .......................................................... 154
4.15 Circuit examples .......................................................................... 155
4.15.1 Star-delta starting......................................................................... 155
4.15.2 4x shift register............................................................................ 156
4.15.3 Running light................................................................................ 159
4.15.4 Stairwell lighting........................................................................... 160
5settings................................................................................ 163
5.1 Password protection.................................................................... 163
5.1.1 Password setup ........................................................................... 164
5.1.2 Selecting the scope of the password .......................................... 164
5.1.3 Activating Passwords................................................................... 165
5.1.4 unlocking.............................................................................. 165
5.1.5 Changing or deleting the password range ................................... 166
5.1.6 Password incorrect or no longer known ...................................... 167
5.2 Changing the menu language ...................................................... 167
5.3 Alter parameters .......................................................................... 168
5.3.1 Adjustable parameters for function relays ................................... 169
5.4 Setting date and time................................................................... 170
5.4.1 Set time ....................................................................................... 170
5.4.2 Setting summer time start and end............................................. 171
5.4.3 Setting summer time start and end............................................. 172
5.4.4 Summer time start and end, setting the rule............................... 172
5.5 Activating input delay (debounce)................................................ 176
5.5.1 Activating debounce (input delay)................................................ 176
5.5.2 Deactivating debounce (input delay)............................................ 177
5.6 Activating and deactivating the P buttons.................................... 177
5.6.1 Activating P buttons..................................................................... 177
5.6.2 Function of the P buttons ............................................................ 178
5.6.3 Deactivating the P buttons........................................................... 178
5.7 Startup behavior........................................................................... 178
5.7.1 Setting the startup behavior......................................................... 178
5.7.2 Behavior when the circuit diagram is deleted.............................. 179
5.7.3 Behavior during upload/download to card or PC.......................... 179
5.7.4 Possible Faults............................................................................. 179
5.7.5 Card startup behavior................................................................... 180
5.8 Setting the cycle time.................................................................. 181
5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage) ........................................... 181
5.9.1 Permissible markers and function relays ..................................... 182
5.9.2 Setting retentive behavior............................................................ 182
5.9.3 Deleting retentive actual values................................................... 183
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 5
5.9.4 Transferring retentive behavior .................................................... 183
5.9.5 Changing the operating mode or the circuit diagram ................... 183
5.9.6 Changing the startup behavior in the SYSTEM menu.................. 184
5.10 Displaying device information ...................................................... 185
6 Internal................................................................................ 187
6.1 circuit diagram cycle............................................................. 187
6.1.1 operation and effects on circuit diagram creation ................. 188
6.2 Delay times for inputs and outputs .............................................. 189
6.2.1 Delay times with -DA and -DC basic units...................... 189
6.2.2 Delay time with -AB, -AC basic units.............................. 190
6.2.3 Delay times for the analog inputs of -AB, -DA and
-DC ........................................................................................ 191
6.3 Monitoring of the functionality of the basic unit .......................... 192
6.4 Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with EASY..-D.-T.................. 192
6.5 700 expanding....................................................................... 193
6.5.1 How is an expansion unit recognized?......................................... 193
6.5.2 Transfer behavior ......................................................................... 194
6.5.3 Function monitoring of expansion units....................................... 194
6.6 Saving and loading circuit diagrams ............................................. 195
6.6.1 EASY…-..-..X ................................................................................ 195
6.6.2 Interface ....................................................................................... 196
6.7 Memory card................................................................................ 197
6.7.1 Compatibility with EASY-M-8K, EASY-M-16K memory cards ...... 197
6.7.2 Loading or saving circuit diagrams ............................................... 198
6.8 Soft........................................................................................ 200
6.8.1 Program transfer between Soft and 500/700................. 200
6.8.2 Soft help................................................................................ 201
6.9 with a remote display and operator unit............................... 202
6.10 Device version.............................................................................. 202
7 What Happens If …? .................................................................. 203
7.1 Messages from the system .................................................. 203
7.2 Possible situations when creating circuit diagrams ..................... 204
7.3 Event ............................................................................................ 205
8 Appendix..................................................................................... 207
8.1 Approval and Certification ............................................................ 207
8.1.1 Approvals and national approvals for 500/700 devices ......... 207
8.1.2 Shipping approvals for 500/700 devices................................ 207
8.1.3 Approvals and national approvals for expansion devices ............. 208
8.1.4 Shipping approvals for expansion units 6.............................. 208
8.2 Dimensions .................................................................................. 208
8.3 Technical data .............................................................................. 210
8.3.1 Standards ..................................................................................... 210
6Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3.2 General ........................................................................................ 210
8.3.3 Power supply ............................................................................... 212
8.3.4 Digital inputs ................................................................................ 213
8.3.5 Rapid counter inputs.................................................................... 217
8.3.6 Analog inputs ............................................................................... 217
8.3.7 Relay outputs............................................................................... 218
8.3.8 Transistor outputs........................................................................ 220
8.4 List of the function relays ............................................................ 222
8.4.1 Usable contacts ........................................................................... 222
8.4.2 Available function relays .............................................................. 223
8.4.3 Names of relays........................................................................... 223
8.4.4 Names of function relay............................................................... 224
8.4.5 Name of function block inputs (constants, operands).................. 224
8.5 Compatibility of the function relay parameters ............................ 224
8.5.1 Parameter display of analog value comparator ............................ 224
8.5.2 Parameter display of counters ..................................................... 225
8.5.3 Parameter display of weekly timer .............................................. 225
8.5.4 Parameter display of timing relay................................................. 225
8.5.5 Compatibility of memory cards.................................................... 225
9 Glossary of terms....................................................................... 227
0 About This Manual
0.1 List of revisions
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 7
0 About This Manual
This manual describes the installation, commissioning and programming
(circuit diagram generation) of the easy500 and easy700 control relay.
Specialist electrical training is needed for commissioning and creating circuit
diagrams. When active components such as motors or pressure cylinders
are controlled, parts of the system can be damaged and persons put at risk if
the MFD device is connected or programmed incorrectly.
0.1 List of revisions
The following are the main changes and amendments which have been
made since the edition 08/04 and 01/05 of this manual:
0.2 Device designation
This manual uses the following abbreviated designations for different device
models:
Publication
date
Page Subject New Modifi-
cation
05/10 29 Hazard warning about the correct connection of the L
main pole and N neutral conductor
✓
127 Timing relay - Signal Diagrams in fig. 64 + 68 ✓
127 Timing relay - Retriggering during response delay ✓
137 year time switch - additional examples ✓
194 Times of the timeout watchdogs, system control ✓
225 „Compatibility of memory cards“ ✓
Designation Device types
easy500 EASY512-AB...
EASY512-AC...
EASY512-DA...
EASY512-DC...
easy700 EASY719-AB...
EASY719-AC...
EASY719-DA...
EASY719-DC...
EASY721-DC...
easy-AB EASY512-AB...
EASY719-AB...
easy-AC EASY512-AC...
EASY618-AC-RE
EASY719-AC..
easy-DA EASY512-DA...
EASY719-DA...
0 About This Manual
0.3 Writing conventions
8Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
0.3 Writing conventions
Symbols used in this manual have the following meanings:
▶indicates actions to be taken.
For greater clarity, the name of the current chapter is shown in
the 1. headline and the name of the current section in the 2. headline.
easy-DC EASY512-DC...
EASY6..-DC...
EASY719-DC...
EASY721-DC...
easy-E EASY2..
EASY618-AC-RE
EASY618-DC-RE
EASY620-DC-TE
EASY512-..-... EASY7..-..-... Type designation of the control relay, the dots represent placeholders for all
characters used
Designation Device types
CAUTION
Warns about the possibility of material damage.
WARNING
Warns of the possibility of hazardous situations that may
possibly cause injury.
WARNING
Warns of the possibility of hazardous situations that could result
in serious injury or even death.
DANGER
Warns of hazardous situations that result in serious injury or
death.
￫Draws your attention to interesting tips and supplementary
information.
1
1.1 Target group
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 9
1
1.1 Target group
easy must only be installed and connected up by trained electricians or other
persons who are familiar with the installation of electrical equipment.
Specialist electrical training is needed for commissioning and creating circuit
diagrams. When active components such as motors or pressure cylinders
are controlled, parts of the system can be damaged and persons put at risk if
the MFD device is connected or programmed incorrectly.
1.2 Proper use
easy is a programmable switching and controlgear and is used as a
replacement for relay and contactor control circuits. easy may only be
operated when it has been correctly and properly installed.
•easy is designed to be installed in an enclosure, switch cabinet or service
distribution board. Both the power supply and the signal terminals must
be laid and covered so as to prevent accidental contact.
•The installation must comply with regulations for electromagnetic
compatibility EMC.
•The power up of easy must not cause any hazards arising from activated
devices, such as unexpected motor startups or power ups.
1.2.1 Improper use
easy should not be used as a substitute for safety-related controls such as
burner or crane controls, emergency-stop or two-hand safety controls.
1
1.3 Overview
10 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
1.3 Overview
Figure 1: easy basic units and expansion devices
POW
BUS
POWER
COM-ERR
ADR
ERR MS
NS
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
5
6
7
8
12
11
11
9
10
10
1
1.3 Overview
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 11
Legend for figure 1:
aeasy500 basic unit
beasy700 basic device with EASY-LINK-DS data connector
cDetachable text display consists of MFD-80(-B) and MFD(-AC)-CP4-500
dEASY209-SE ethernet gateway, connection via the serial multi-function interface
eEASY204-DP PROFIBUS-DP slave gateway
fEASY205-ASI AS-Interface slave gateway
gEASY221-CO CANopen gateway
hEASY222-DN DeviceNet gateway
iEASY202-RE output expansion
jI/O expansion EASY410-DC-…
kI/O expansion EASY6..-…-.E
lEASY200-EASY coupling device
easy is an electronic control relay with logic functions, timer, counter and
time switch functions. It is also a control and input device in one, that can
perform many different tasks in domestic applications as well as in machine
building and plant construction.
easy ensures correct functioning at the start and during operation by
executing internal tests and with the help of various timeout watchdogs,
(￫Table 34:, Page 192).
Circuit diagrams are connected up using ladder diagrams. and each element
is entered directly via the easy display. You can:
•Connect N/O and N/C contacts in series and in parallel
•switch output relays and auxiliary relays,
•Use outputs as relays, impulse relays or latching relays,
•Use multi-function timing relays with different functions,
•Use up and down counters,
•Count high-speed counter pulses,
•Measure frequencies,
•Process analog inputs, easy-AB, easy-DA, easy-DC, (EASY512…: two
analog inputs, easy700: four analog inputs),
•Display any texts with variables, enter setpoints,
•Use year time switches, weekly timer, EASY…-…-.C(X),
•Count operating hours (four retentive operating hours counters are
integrated),
•trace the power flow in the circuit diagram,
•load, store and password protect a circuit diagram.
If you wish to wire easy via your PC, use the easySoft-Basic or easySoft-Pro
programming software. easySoft allows you to create and test your program
(circuit diagram) on the PC. It also allows you to print out your circuit diagram
in DIN/IEC, ANSI/CSA or easy format.
1
1.4 Versions
12 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
1.4 Versions
easy basic units at a glance
Figure 2: Versions
aSupply voltage connection
bInputs
cStatus LED
dKeypad
eInterface socket for memory card or PC connection
fOutputs
gDisplay
DEL ALT
ESC OK
햳
햲
햸
햷
ESC OK
DEL ALT
햵
햴
햶
1
1.4 Versions
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 13
easy basic units with stand-alone MFD-80…, MFD-CP4-500 HMI unit
Figure 3: Overview with stand-alone HMI unit
aeasy500 basic units
beasy700 basic units
cDisplay/operating unit MFD-80(-B)
dPower supply/communication module with MFD(-AC)-CP4-500 interface cable
1
3
3
2
4
1
1.4 Versions
14 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
1.4.1 Key to part numbers
Table 1: Overview of comparable easy400 types with easy500 and easy600 with easy700
EASY - x x x - x x - x x x
LCD display: X = No display
Time switch: C = Available; E = Expansion
Output type:
R = Relay (max. 8 A)
T = Transistor (0.5 A, parallel connection possible up to 2 A)
Supply voltage, device and inputs
AB = 24 V AC (2, (4) inputs, also usable as 0 to 10 V analog inputs)
AC = 100, 120, 230, 240 V AC
DC = 24 V DC (2 (4) inputs, also usable as 0 to 10 V analog inputs)
DA = 12 V DC (2 (4) inputs, also usable as 0 to 10 V analog inputs)
Number of inputs/outputs (+ expansion)
12 = 8 I/4 O
18 = 12 I/6 O
19 = 12 I/6 O + expansion
20 = 12 I/8 O
21 = 12 I/8 O + expansion
Rating class (RC) and space unit (SU)
2 = 35.5 mm (SU)
4, 5 = 71.5 mm (4 SU), RC = 4 or 5
6, 7= 107.5 mm (6SU), RC = 6 or 7
Control relays easy
easy400, easy600 easy500, easy700
–EASY512-AB-RC
–EASY512-AB-RCX
EASY412-AC-R EASY512-AC-R
EASY412-AC-RC EASY512-AC-RC
EASY412-AC-RCX EASY512-AC-RCX
EASY412-DA-RC EASY512-DA-RC
EASY412-DA-RCX EASY512-DA-RCX
EASY412-DC-R EASY512-DC-R
EASY412-DC-RC EASY512-DC-RC
EASY412-DC-RCX EASY512-DC-RCX
EASY412-DC-TC EASY512-DC-TC
EASY412-DC-TCX EASY512-DC-TCX
–EASY719-AB-RC
–EASY719-AB-RCX
EASY619-AC-RC EASY719-AC-RC
EASY619-AC-RCX EASY719-AC-RCX
–EASY719-DA-RC
–EASY719-DA-RCX
EASY619-DC-RC EASY719-DC-RC
EASY619-DC-RCX EASY719-DC-RCX
EASY621-DC-TC EASY721-DC-TC
EASY621-DC-TCX EASY721-DC-TCX
1
1.5 operating principles
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 15
1.5 operating principles
1.5.1 Key Pad
1.5.2 Selecting menus and entering values
DEL: Delete object in circuit diagram
ALT: Special functions in circuit diagram, Status display
Cursor buttons úí ÍÚ:
Move cursor
Select menu items
Set contact numbers, contacts and values
OK: Next menu level, Save your entry
ESC: Previous menu level, Cancel
ALT
DELDELDELDELDELDELDELDELDELDEL
ESC OK
and
Calling the System menu
Move to next menu level Call menu item Activate, change,
store entries
Move to previous menu level
Cancel entries since last OK
ÍÚ
úí
Change menu item
Change value
Change place
P button function:
ú
íInput P1,
Input P3,
Í
ÚInput P2
Input P4
1
1.5 operating principles
16 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
1.5.3 Choosing the main and system menu
1.5.3.1 Status indicator
1.5.3.2 Toggling between weekday, time display and date display
(only on devices with clock)
1.2
RS
MO
.2…6..
I ..2..5...
P-
MO 02:00
..34…. RUN
and
No
password
PROGRAM...
STOPå RUN
PARAMETER
INFO...
SET CLOCK
SECURITY…
SYSTEM...
LANGUAGE...
easy500: 8 inputs, 4 outputs
Current selection
flashes in the
easy menu
Clock menu on
devices with clock
1st menu level
Main menu
1. Menu mode
System menu
easy500 or
easy700
SECURITY…
SYSTEM...
LANGUAGE...
CONFIGURATOR
The CONFIGURATOR menu
appears if a configurable
expansion module is
connected such as EASY204-
DP (Profibus-DP bus gateway)
.2..5.......
P-
MO 11:50
..34 RUN .2..5.......
P-
2010-04-01
34 RUN
1
1.5 operating principles
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 17
1.5.4 Status indicator
1.5.5 Status display for local expansion
1.5.6 Advanced Status display
easy500: input 1 to 8,
easy700: input 1 to 12
Inputs
Weekday/Time or Weekday/Date
Outputs RUN/STOP mode
easy500: output 1 to 4,
easy700: output 1 to 6 or 8
On: 1, 2, 3, 4/Off:…
.2..5.......
P-
MO 11:50
Q ..34..STOP .2..5.......
P-
2010-04-01
Q ..34..STOP
1.......9...
RS AC P-
MO 10:42
1.....7. RUN
Inputs
Expansion device
Weekday/Time or Weekday/Date
Outputs
On: 1, 2, 3, 4/Off:…
RS = Expansion functioning correctly
1.......9...
RS AC P-
MO 10:42
1.....7. RUN
Retention/debounce AC expansion ok/P buttons
Start behavior
RE : Retention switched on
I: Debounce switched on
AC : AC expansion functioning correctly
DC : DC expansion functioning correctly
GW : Bus coupling module detected
GW flashes: Only easy200-easy detected. I/O expansion not detected.
04.03.17 Display of actual device date
ST : When the power supply is switched on, easy switches to STOP mode
12...6.89...
RE I AC P-
04.03.17 ST
123.5.78 RUN
1
1.5 operating principles
18 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
1.5.7 LED display
EASY512-…-…X, easy700 and easy-E feature an LED on the front indicating
the status of the power supply as well as whether RUN or STOP mode is
active (￫, page12).
1.5.8 Menu structure
1.5.8.1 Main menu without password protection
▶You access the main menu by pressing OK.
LED OFF No supply voltage
LED continuously lit Power supply present, STOP mode
LED flashing Power supply present, RUN mode
PROGRAM...Æ
STOP åRUN
PARAMETER
INFO... æ
SET CLOCK..
PROGRAM...
DELETE PROG
MODE
SAVE
CANCEL
Main menu
STOP: Circuit diagram
display
Parameters
Circuit Diagram
Parameter
display
DELETE ?
PROGRAM...
DELETE PROG
CARD...
DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD
REPLACE ?
PROGRAM...
DELETE PROG
CARD...
DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD
DELETE ?
DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD
The
arrows
indicate
that there
are more
than four
menus.
REPLACE ?
1
1.5 operating principles
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 19
PROGRAM...Æ
STOP RUN å
PARAMETER
INFO... æ
SET CLOCK..
Main menu
Parameter display
SET CLOCK..
SUMMER
TIME...
PROGRAM...
Æ
STOP RUN
å
PARAMETER...
INFO...
æ
PROGRAM...
STOP RUN
Æ
PARAMETER
INFO...
SET CLOCK.
æ
Display for date and time
setting
HH:MM --:--
TT.MM --.--
YEAR
____
HH:MM 14:23
TT.MM 17.03
YEAR 2010
T1 X S +
T2
Ü
M:S +
C1 N +
O1 +
T1 X S +
S1 10.000
S2 +0
T:
Information display of the device
PROGRAM...
Æ
STOP RUN
å
PARAMETER...
INFO...
æ
SET CLOCK.. DC TC LCD
OS: 1.00.027
CRC: 02752
1
1.5 operating principles
20 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
AM --
Æ
WD: --
--
TT.MM:00.00
æ
HH:MM:00:00
DIFF: 00:00
NONE
Æ
RULE...
å
EU
GB
æ
US
NONE
Æ
RULE...
EU
GB
æ
US
AM --
Æ
WD: --
--
TT.MM:00.00
æ
HH:MM:00:00
DIFF: 00:00
Main menu
PROGRAM...
STOP RUN
Æ
PARAMETER..
INFO...
SET CLOCK.
æ
SET CLOCK..
SUMMER TIME…
Only one selection is possible.
NONE
åÆ
RULE...
EU
GB
æ
US
SUMMER START
SUMMER END
SUMMER START
SUMMER END
SET CLOCK..
SUMMER TIME…
NONE
Æ
RULE...
å
EU
GB
æ
US
SUMMER START
SUMMER END
SET CLOCK..
SUMMER TIME…
SET CLOCK..
SUMMER TIME…
1
1.5 operating principles
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 21
1.5.8.2 Main menu with password protection
1.5.8.3 System menu
The System menu is accessed by simultaneously pressing DEL and ALT.
PASSWORD..
Æ
STOP RUN
å
PARAMETER...
INFO...
æ
SET CLOCK..
Password
Password entryUnlocking
easy
Main menu
PASSWORD...
STOP RUN
å
DELETE ?
Correct entry
Status indicator
four wrong entries
(if enabled)
Example:
Password only
on program
PROGRAM
åÆ
PARAMETER
å
CLOCK
å
OPRTNG MODEæ
INTERFACE.
å
DEL PROG
å
PROGRAM
å
Æ
PARAMETER
CLOCK
OPRTNG MODE
æ
INTERFACE
DEL PROG
ENTER
PASSW..
XXXX
System menu
ACTIVATE PW
CHANGE PW
Password entry
Change/
delete
password
SECURITY…
SYSTEM...
LANGUAGE...
CONFIGURATOR
Password setup
PASSWORD...
RANGE...
ENTER
PASSW..
XXXX
CHANGE PW
ACTIVATE PW
CHANGE PW
ACTIVATE PW
PASSWORD...
RANGE...
1
1.5 operating principles
22 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
1.5.9 Selecting or toggling between menu items
1.5.10 Cursor display
ENGLISH
Æ
DEUTSCH
å
FRANCAIS
ESPANOL
æ
ITALIANO
PORTUGUES
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
POLSKI
TURKCE
CESKY
MAGYAR
System menu
SECURITY…
SYSTEM...
LANGUAGE...
CONFIGURATOR
SECURITY…
SYSTEM...
LANGUAGE...
CONFIGURATOR
The further menus depend on the connected expansion device.
Only one selection is possible.
SECURITY…
SYSTEM...
LANGUAGE...
CONFIGURATOR
DEBOUNCE.
å
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE
å
CARD MODE
CYCLE-T...
RETENTION
Cursor Í Ú
Select or toggle
PROGRAM...
STOP
PARAMETER
INFO
The cursor flashes.
Full cursor Ê/:
•Move cursor with ú í,
•in circuit diagram also with ÍÚ
Value M/M
•Change position with ú í
•Change values with Í Ú
Flashing values/menus are shown in grey in
this manual.
HH:MM
â
4:23
TT.MM 17.03
YEAR 2010
HH:MM 14:23
TT.MM 17.03
YEAR 2010
1
1.5 operating principles
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 23
1.5.11 Set value
Select value Í Ú
Select digit ú í
Change value at digit Í Ú
Store entries
Retain previous value
HH:MM 14:23
TT.MM 17.03
YEAR 2010
Values
Digits
Current value at the position
(can be changed, Cursor = 3)
1
1.5 operating principles
24 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2 Installation
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 25
2 Installation
easy must only be installed and wired up by trained electricians or other
persons familiar with the installation of electrical equipment.
easy is installed in the following order:
•Assemble devices if necessary,
•Mounting,
•Wiring up the inputs,
•Wiring up the outputs,
•Connecting the power supply.
DANGER
Never carry out electrical work on the device while the power
supply is switched on, there is danger of electric shock.
Always follow the safety rules:
•Switch off and isolate
•Secure against retriggering.
•Verify isolation from the supply.
•Cover adjacent live parts.
2 Installation
2.1 Mounting
26 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.1 Mounting
Install the easy in a control cabinet, service distribution board or in an
enclosure so that the power supply and terminal connections cannot be
touched accidentally during operation.
Clip easy onto a DIN EN 50022 top-hat rail or fix easy in place using fixing
brackets. easy can be mounted vertically or horizontally.
For ease of wiring, leave a gap of at least 30 mm between easy terminals
and the wall or adjacent devices.
Figure 4: Clearances to easy
2.1.1 Mounting on top-hat rail
▶Hook easy to the top edge of the top-hat rail and hinge into place while
pressing down slightly. Press down lightly on both the device and the
top-hat rail until the unit snaps over the lower edge of the top-hat rail.
Easy will clip into place and will be secured by the built-in spring mechanism.
▶Check that the device is seated firmly.
The device is mounted vertically on a top-hat rail in the same way.
￫When using easy with expansion units, connect the expansion
concerned before mounting (￫section “2.2 Connecting the
expansion device”, page 28).
30 mm
(1.18“)
30 mm
(1.18“)
30 mm
(1.18“)
30 mm
(1.18“)
1
2
2 Installation
2.1 Mounting
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 27
2.1.2 Screw mounting
Mounting on a mounting plate requires the use of fixing brackets which are
fixed to the back of easy. The fixing brackets are available as an accessory.
easy600 and easy700: Fasten each device with at least three fixing brackets.
Figure 5: Screw mounting
EASY200-EASY: easy500: easy600, easy700:
2 Installation
2.2 Connecting the expansion device
28 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.2 Connecting the expansion device
Figure 6: Connecting expansion units
▶Open the easy-Link connections on the side of both easy devices.
▶Fit the easyLink data connector EASY-LINK-DS in the opening provided
on the expansion device.
▶Plug the devices together.
▶Proceed in the reverse order to dismantle the device.
1
3
4
2
2 Installation
2.3 Ter minations
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 29
2.3 Terminations
2.3.1 Tools
Slot-head screwdriver, width 3.5 mm, tightening torque 0.6 Nm.
2.3.2 Cable cross-sections
•Solid: 0.2 to 4 mm2
•Flexible with ferrule: 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
2.4 Connecting the power supply
2.4.1 Cable protection
Connect on easy a cable protection (F1) rated for at least 1 A (slow).
2.4.2 Supplying AC basic units
EASY…-AB-RC(RCX), EASY…-AC-R(RC, RCX)
Figure 7: Supply voltage to AC basic unit
￫The required connection data for device types,
easy-AB with 24 V AC, easy-AC with standard voltages of
100 V AC up to 240 V AC, easy-DA with 12 V DC and easy-DC
with 24 V DC are provided in the (￫section “8.3 Technical
data”, page 210).
The easy500 and easy700 basic units run a system test for two
seconds after the power supply has been switched on. Either
RUN or STOP mode will be activated after these two seconds,
depending on the default setting.
￫When easy is switched on for the first time, its power supply
circuit behaves like a capacitor. Ensure that reed relay contacts
or proximity switches are not used as the switching device for
switching on the power supply.
NNL
N
F1
L
2 Installation
2.4 Connecting the power supply
30 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.4.3 Supplying AC expansion units
EASY…-AC-.E
Figure 8: Power supply on the AC expansion units
WARNING
Ensure the proper connection of the L phase conductor and N
neutral conductor if you are using easy-AS devices with a power
supply greater than 24 V AC!
If the L phase conductor and N neutral conductor connections
are reversed, the full connection voltage of the L phase
conductor (100 to 240 V AC) is present on the serial multi-
function interface.
Improper connection on the multi-function interface or the
insertion of conductive objects in the shaft may cause fatal
electric shock.
For your safety:
•Use the original programming cable, which ensures safe
electrical isolation of the PC terminal from the connection
voltage of the L phase conductor (100 to 240 V AC).
Press the interface cover back onto the shaft if you no longer
need the interface.
CAUTION
A short current surge will be produced when switching on for
the first time. Do not switch on easy with reed contacts
because these could possibly burn or stick.
NNL
N
F1
L
E+ E- R1 ... R12
2 Installation
2.4 Connecting the power supply
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 31
2.4.4 Supplying DC basic units
EASY…-DA-RC(X), EASY…-DC-R(RC,RCX)
Figure 9: Power supply on the DC basic units
2.4.5 Supplying DC expansion devices
Figure 10: Power supply on the DC expansion units
+...V 0 V0 V
L01⫺
F1
L01⫹
DC : +24 V
DA : +12 V
￫easy-DC and easy-DA are protected against reverse polarity.
To ensure that easy works correctly, ensure that the polarity of
each terminal is correct.
0V0V24V
L01-
F1
L01+
E+ E- R1 ... R12
24 V H
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
32 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.5 Connecting inputs
easy inputs switch electronically. Once you have connected a contact via an
input terminal, you can reuse it as a contact in your easy circuit diagram as
often as you like.
Figure 11: Connecting inputs
Connect to the easy input terminals contacts such as pushbuttons, switches,
relay or contactor contacts, proximity switches (three-wire).
2.5.1 Connect digital AC inputs
2.5.1.1 Connect digital AC inputs to the basic unit
Figure 12: Connecting easy-AC and easy-AB digital inputs
+24 V
S1
0 V I1
I1 i1
L
N
WARNING
Connect the inputs on AC devices according to the VDE, IEC,
UL and CSA safety requirements. To supply the inputs, use the
same main pole to which the power supply of the device is
connected. easy will otherwise not detect the signal level and
may be destroyed by overvoltage.
l1 I2 I7
L
N
LNN
F1
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 33
2.5.1.2 Connect digital AC inputs to the expansion unit
Figure 13: Connecting EASY…-AC-E digital inputs
Table 2: easy-AB input signal values
Table 3: easy-AC input signals
Voltage range of the input signals Input current
OFF signal ON signal
easy500/
easy700
I1 - I6 0 - 6 V AC 14 - 26.4 V AC 4 mA at 24 V AC
I7, I8 ≧ 7 V AC or
≧ 9.5 V DC
2 mA with 24 V AC and 24 V DC
easy700 I9, I10 14 to 26.4 V AC 4 mA at 24 V AC
I11, I12 ≧ 7 V AC or
≧ 9.5 V DC
2 mA with 24 V AC and 24 V DC
Voltage range of the input signals Input current
OFF signal ON signal
easy500/
easy700
I1 - I6 0 - 40 V 79 - 264 V 0.5 mA at 230 V AC/0.25 mA at
115 V AC
I7, I8 6 mA at 230 V AC/4 mA at 115 V
easy700 I9 - I12 0.5 mA at 230 V AC/0.25 mA at
115 V AC
easy600 R1 - R12
L
N
R10R9R8R7R6R5R4R3R2R1E+ E- R11 R12 NNL
F1
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
34 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.5.1.3 Cable lengths
Severe interference can cause a signal 1 on the inputs without a proper
signal being applied. Observe therefore the following maximum cable
lengths:
With longer cables you can, for example, connect a 1A diode (e.g. 1N4007)
with a blocking voltage of at least 1000 V in series with the easy input.
Ensure that the diode is pointing towards the input as shown in the circuit
diagram, otherwise easy will not detect the 1 state.
Figure 14: AC input with suppression diode for easy-AC and easy-AB
easy-AC:
Inputs I7 and I8 have a higher input current on the easy-AC. Neon bulbs with
a maximum residual current of 2 mA/1 mA at 230 V/115 V can be connected
to I7 and I8.
Two-wire proximity switches have a residual current with the “0” state. If
this residual current is too high, the easy input may only detect a “1” signal.
Use therefore the inputs I7, I8. An additional input circuit is required if more
inputs are needed.
I1 to I6 40 m without additional circuit
I7, I8 100 m without additional circuit
I9 to I12 40 m without additional circuit
R1 to R12
￫Always use neon bulbs that are operated with a separate N
connection.
WARNING
Do not use reed relay contacts at I7, I8. These may burn or melt
due to the high inrush current of I7, I8.
L
N
LNNI1
F1
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 35
2.5.1.4 Increased input current
The following input circuit can be used in order to prevent interference and
also when using two-wire proximity switches:
Figure 15: Increased input current
A resistor can be connected in series with the circuit shown in order to
restrict the inrush current.
Figure 16: Limitation of the input current through resistors
Complete devices for increasing the input current are available under the part
no. EASY256-HCI.
Figure 17: easy with EASY256-HCI
￫When using a 100 nF capacitor, the drop-out time of the input
increases by 80 (66.6) ms at 50 (60) Hz.
￫The increased capacitance increases the drop-off time by approx.
40 ms.
L
N
LNNI1
100 nF/275 V h
F1
L
N
LNNI1
100 nF/275 V h
1 kO
F1
L
F1
N
LNNI1 1N
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
36 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.5.2 Connecting easy DC digital inputs
Use input terminals I1 to I12 , R1 to R12 to connect pushbutton actuators,
switches or 3 or 4-wire proximity switches. Given the high residual current,
do not use 2-wire proximity switches.
2.5.2.1 Connecting DC digital inputs on the basic unit
Figure 18: Connecting easy-DC, easy-DA digital inputs
2.5.2.2 Connect digital DC inputs to the expansion unit
Figure 19: Connecting EASY…-DC-E digital inputs
Table 4: easy-DC input signals
L01⫹
L01⫺
0 V l1 I2 I7
+...V
DC : +24 V
DA : +12 V
F1
Voltage range of the input signals Input current
OFF signal ON signal
easy500/
easy700
I1 to I6 0 - 5 V 15 - 28.8 V 3.3 mA at 24 V DC
I7, I8 ≧ 8 V DC 2.2 mA at 24 V
easy700 I9, I10 15 - 28.8 V 3.3 mA at 24 V DC
I11, I12 ≧ 8 V DC 2.2 mA at 24 V
easy600 R1 - R12 15 - 28.8 V 3.3 mA at 24 V DC
+24 V
0V
R10R9R8R7R6R5R4R3R2R1E+ E- R11 R12 0V0V+24V
Input 24 V 24 V
F1
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 37
Table 5: easy-DA input signals
2.5.3 Connecting analog inputs
The easy-AB, easy-DA and easy-DC basic units are provided with analog
inputs. Inputs I7 and I8, and if present I11 and I12, can be used to connect
analog voltages ranging from 0 V to 10 V. A simple additional circuit also
allows the analog evaluation of currents from 0 to 20 mA. The analog input
signals are converted to 10-bit digital signals.
The following applies:
•0 V DC corresponds to a digital 0.
•5 V DC corresponds to a digital value of 512.
•10 V DC corresponds to a digital value of 1023.
2.5.3.1 Safety measures with analog signals
▶Use screened, twisted pair conductors, to stop interference of the
analogue signals.
▶For short cable lengths, ground the shield at both ends using a large
contact area. If the cable length is more than around 30 m, grounding at
both ends can result in equalization currents between the two grounding
points and thus in the interference of analog signals. In this case, only
ground the cable at one end.
▶Do not lay signal cables parallel to power cables.
▶Connect inductive loads to be switched via the easy outputs to a
separate supply voltage, or use a suppressor circuit for motors and
valves. Supplying loads such as motors, solenoid valves or contactors
and easy from the same supply voltage may cause interference of the
analog input signal when switching.
Voltage range of the input signals Input current
OFF signal ON signal
easy500/
easy700
I1 -I6 0-4 V DC 8 - 15.6 V DC 3.3 mA at 12 V
I7, I8 1.1 mA at 12 V
easy700 I9, I10 3.3 mA at 12 V
I11, I12 1.1 mA at 12 V
WARNING
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital
signals. Consequently, greater care must be taken when laying
and connecting the signal lines.
Incorrect connection may lead to unwanted switching states.
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
38 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
The following four circuits contain examples of applications for analog value
processing.
2.5.3.2 Power supply of -AB devices and analog inputs
With easy-AB devices that process analog signals, the device must be fed via
a transformer so that the device is isolated from the mains supply. The
neutral conductor and the reference potential of the DC power feed of analog
sensors must be electrically connected.
Figure 20: easy-AB analog input, connection of reference potentials
WARNING
Ensure that the reference potential is connected. Connect the
0 V of the power supply unit for the different setpoint
potentiometers and sensors shown in the examples to the 0 V
and neutral conductor terminal (easy-AB) of the easy power
supply. Otherwise incorrect switching states may occur if they
are not connected correctly.
￫Ensure that the common reference potential is grounded or
monitored by a ground fault monitoring device. Observe the
applicable regulations.
I7L NI1N
L
N
~
0 V +12 V
L01h
N01 h
I8
F1
EASY200-POW
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 39
2.5.3.3 Analog setpoint potentiometer, -AB, -DA, -DC
Figure 21: Analog setpoint potentiometer with own power feed
Use a potentiometer with the resistance ≤1kΩ, e.g. 1 kΩ, 0.25 W.
2.5.3.4 -DC analog setpoint potentiometer
Figure 22: Analog setpoint potentiometer with 24 V DC power feed
2.5.3.5 Brightness sensor -AB, -DA, -DC
Figure 23: Connection of a brightness sensor, analog input
~
0 V +12 V
I7+...V
L 0 V
N
0 V
N
F1
L01⫺
L01⫹
1.3 kO/0.25 W
1 kO/0.25 W
0 V 0 V I7
+...V
DC : +24 V
DA : +12 V
F1
0 V
0...10 V
12 V
~
0 V +12 V
I7+...V
L 0 V
N
0 V
N
F1
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
40 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.5.3.6 Temperature sensor, -DA, -DC
Figure 24: Connection of the temperature sensor, analog input
2.5.3.7 20 mA sensor
4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) sensors can be connected easily without any
problem using an external 500 Ω resistor.
Figure 25: Connection 0 (4) to 20 mA sensor output, analog input
aAnalog sensor
The following values apply:
•4 mA = 1.9 V
•10 mA = 4.8 V
•20 mA = 9.5 V
(according to U = R x I = 478 Ω x 10 mA ~ 4.8 V).
+24 V
–0 V
Out
0...10 V –35...55 ˚C
I7+...V
L 0 V
N
0 V
N
F1
L01⫹
F1
L01⫺
햲
500
4...20 mA
I7+...V 0 V0 V
DC : +24 V
DA : +12 V
2 Installation
2.5 Connecting inputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 41
2.5.4 Connecting high-speed counters and frequency generators
High-speed counter signals and frequencies on the easy-DA and easy-DA can
be counted accurately on inputs I1 to I4 independently of the cycle time.
These inputs are permanently assigned to counters.
The following applies:
•I1 = C13 high-speed up/down counter
•I2 = C14 high-speed up/down counter
•I3 = C15 frequency counter
•I4 = C16 frequency counter
Pulse shape of count signals:
easy processes square wave signals.
Mark-to-space ratio of count signals:We recommend a mark-to-space ratio of
1:1.
If this is not the case:The minimum pulse or pause duration is 0.5 ms.
tmin = 0.5 x (1/fmax)
tmin = minimum time of the pulse or pause duration
fmax = maximum count frequency (1 kHz)
Figure 26: Connecting high-speed counters and frequency generators
￫Inputs that are used as high-speed counter inputs should not be
used in the circuit diagram as contacts. If the counter frequency
is high:
Not all the signals of the high-speed counter can be monitored
for processing in the circuit diagram. easy will only process a
randomly logged state.
0 V
0 V
...V
L01 –
F1
L01 +
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
L02 +
24 V H
2 Installation
2.6 Connecting outputs
42 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.6 Connecting outputs
The Q outputs operate inside the easy as isolated contacts.
Figure 27: Q output
The associated relay coils are controlled in the easy circuit diagram via the
following outputs:
•Q1 to Q4 and Q1 to Q8 (Q6), basic units.
•S1 to S8 (S6), expansion devices.
The signal states of the outputs can be used in the easy circuit diagram as
N/O or N/C contacts for other switching conditions.
The relay or transistor outputs are used to switch loads such as fluorescent
tubes, filament bulbs, contactors, relays or motors. Prior to installation
observe the technical limit values and data for the outputs (￫section “8.3
Technical data”, page 210).
2.6.1 Connecting relay outputs
2.6.1.1 EASY512-..-R..
Figure 28: EASY512-…-R… relay outputs
Q1 q1
Q1
12
0 V H, N
F8 A/B 16
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 V h)
+ 24 V H
25 000
RL
24 V H 8 A
115 V h 8 A
230 V h 8 A
3 A
3 A
3 A
1000 W
10 x 58 W
12121212
10 000 000
Q1
S1
Q2
S2
Q3
S3
Q4
S4
2 Installation
2.6 Connecting outputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 43
2.6.1.2 EASY7..-..-R.. and EASY202-RE
Figure 29: EASY7..-..-R.. relay outputs and EASY202-RE
2.6.1.3 EASY618-..-RE
Figure 30: EASY618…-…-RE… relay outputs
Unlike the inputs, the outputs can be connected to different phases.
￫The EASY202-RE cannot be operated on an EASY7..-DA-R.. with
a 12 V DC power supply.
+ 24 V H
0 V H, N
F8 A/B 16
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 V h)
12 2 2 2 2 2
11111
10 000 000
Q6Q5Q4Q3
Q2
Q1
F 8 A/B 16
+ 24 V H
0 V H, N
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 V
h
)
12 2
1
10 000 000
S2
S1
DANGER
Do not exceed the maximum voltage of 250 V AC on a relay
contact.
If the voltage exceeds this threshold, flashover may occur at the
contact, resulting in damage to the device or a connected load.
0 V H, N
F8 A/B 16
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 V h)
+ 24 V H
25 000
RL
24 V H
8A
115 V h 8A
230 V h 8A
2A
2A
2A
1000 W
10 x 58 W
12 2 2 2 2 2
11111
10 000 000
S6S5S4S3
S2
S1
2 Installation
2.6 Connecting outputs
44 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.6.2 Connecting transistor outputs
2.6.2.1 EASY512-..-T..
Figure 31: EASY512-…-T… transistor outputs
2.6.2.2 EASY7..-..-T..
Figure 32: EASY7-…-T… transistor outputs
0 V H
RL
24 V 0.5 A
+24 V 0 V Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
F10 A
0.5 A
5 W/24 V
f 2.5 A
+ 24 V H
20.4 – 28.8 V H
QQ
(20.4 – 28.8 V H)
+ 24 V H
R
5 W/24 V
0.5 A
0 V H
+24 V 0 V Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
f 2.5 A
F10 A
24 V H0.5 A
Q8
QQ
2 Installation
2.6 Connecting outputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 45
2.6.2.3 EASY620-..-TE
Figure 33: EASY620-…-TE transistor outputs
Parallel connection:
Up to four outputs can be connected in parallel in order to increase the
power. This enables a maximum output current of 2 A.
WARNING
The outputs may only be connected in parallel within a group
(Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8, S1 to S4 or S5 to S8); Q1 and Q3 or Q5,
Q7 and Q8. Parallel outputs must be activated simultaneously.
WARNING
Please note the following when switching off inductive loads:
•Suppressed inductive loads cause less interference in the
entire electrical system. It is generally recommended to
connect the suppressor as close as possible to the
inductance.
0 V H
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 +24 V
f 2.5 A
F10 A
0V
+ 24 V H
R
5 W/24 V
0.5 A
(20.4 – 28.8 V H)
24 V H0.5 A
QQ
2 Installation
2.7 Expanding inputs/outputs .
46 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
If inductive loads are not suppressed, the following applies:
•Several inductive loads should not be switched off simultaneously to
avoid overheating the driver blocks in the worst possible case. If in the
event of an emergency stop the +24 V DC power supply is to be
switched off by means of a contact, and if this would mean switching off
more than one controlled output with an inductive load, then you must
provide suppressor circuits for these loads (see the following diagrams).
Figure 34: Inductive load with suppressor circuit
2.6.3 Behavior in the event of a short-circuit/overload
Should a short circuit or overload occur on a transistor output, this output will
switch off. The output will switch back on up to the maximum temperature
after a cooling time that depends on the ambient temperature and the
current level. If the fault condition persists, the output will keep switching off
and on until the fault is corrected or until the power supply is switched off
(￫section “6.4 Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with EASY..-D.-T..”,
page 192).
2.7 Expanding inputs/outputs .
You can add expansion units to the following easy700 devices in order to
increase the number of inputs and outputs:
Uemax < Uz < 33 V
0 V H
Q..
+ 24 V H
0 V H
Q..
Expandable easy
basic units
Expansion
Devices
Features
EASY7..-..-R..
EASY7..-..-T..
EASY410-DC-.E 24 V DC power supply
• 6 DC inputs,
• 4 relay outputs (...-DC-RE) or
• 4 Transistor outputs (...-DC-TE)
EASY618-..-RE 115/230 V AC power supply
• 12 AC inputs,
•6 relay outputs
24 V DC power supply
• 12 DC inputs,
•6 relay outputs
EASY620-..-TE • 12 DC inputs,
• 8 transistor outputs
EASY202-RE 2 relay outputs
Note: Cannot be operated on an EASY7..-DA-R...
Special expansion units see current catalogue
2 Installation
2.7 Expanding inputs/outputs .
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 47
2.7.1 Local expansion module
Local expansion units are connected directly next to the basic unit.
▶Connect the easy expansion unit via the EASY-LINK-DS bus connector
plug.
Figure 35: Connecting local expansion with basic device
DANGER
The following electrical separation is implemented between the
EASY7.. basic unit and the expansion device (separation always
in local connection of expansion unit):
•Basic isolation 400 V AC (+10 %)
•Safe isolation 240 V AC (+10 %)
Units may be destroyed if the value 400 V AC +10 % is
exceeded, and may cause the malfunction of the entire system
or machine!
￫Basic unit and expansion unit can be provided with different
DC power supplies.
EASY-LINK-DS
EASY2
EASY4…-E
EASY6…-TE
EASY6…-RE
EASY200-EASY
EASY719-...
EASY721-...
EASY2…
2 Installation
2.7 Expanding inputs/outputs .
48 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
2.7.2 Remote expansion
Remote expansion units can be installed and run up to 30 m away from the
basic unit.
Figure 36: Connecting remote expansion units to easy
DANGER
The two-wire or multi-core cable between units must have the
necessary insulation voltage required for the installation
environment concerned. In the event of a fault (ground leakage,
short-circuit) serious damage or injury to persons may otherwise
occur.
A cable such as NYM0 with a rated operating voltage of
Ue = 300/500 V AC is normally sufficient.
￫Terminals E+ and E- of the EASY200-EASY are protected
against short-circuits and polarity reversal.
Functionality is only ensured if "E+" is connected with "E+" and
"E-" with "E-".
E+ E–
E+ E–
EASY719-…
EASY721-…
EASY200-
EASY
EASY6…-RE
EASY6…-TE
Ue = 300/500 V
EASY…-AC-…E
2 Installation
2.8 Connecting bus systems
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 49
2.8 Connecting bus systems
The easy-Link connection is designed in such a way that bus modules other
than input/output expansions can also be connected. Special bus modules
(gateways) are available for the relevant bus systems.
At present easy700 can communicate via the following bus systems or
networks:
•AS-Interface (Actuator-Sensor Interface)
•Profibus-DP
•CANopen
•DeviceNET
•Ethernet gateway.
The functionality of bus systems varies. The following generally applies:
•As a minimum data exchange, the input data R1 to R16 and output data
S1 to S8 can be exchanged, provided that the bus system supports this.
•If the bus system or bus gateway is capable of this, function block, date,
time parameters can be read and written via the bus. The states of
inputs, outputs, markers can be read.
￫easy-Link allows the connection of one device (expansion unit or
bus module).
￫The range and the functions of the bus gateways are being
continually further developed.
Our latest product range or Internet online catalogue contains
the valid and available bus modules.
2 Installation
2.8 Connecting bus systems
50 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
3 Placing into operation
3.1 Switch-on
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 51
3 Placing into operation
3.1 Switch-on
Before switching on easy, check that you have connected the power supply
terminals and inputs correctly:
•24 V AC version easy-AB
•Terminal L: Phase conductor L
•Terminal N: Neutral conductor N
•Terminals I1 to I12:
Actuation via same phase conductor L
•230 V AC version easy-AC
•Terminal L: Phase conductor L
•Terminal N: Neutral conductor N
•Terminals I1 to I12, R1 to R12:
Actuation via phase conductor L
•12 V DC version:
•Terminal +12 V: voltage +12 V
•Terminal 0 V: Voltage 0 V
•Terminals I1 to I12:
Actuation via same +12 V
•24 V DC version:
•Terminal +24 V: Voltage +24 V
•Terminal 0 V: Voltage 0 V
•Terminals I1 to I12, R1 to R12:
Actuation via the same +24 V
If you have already integrated easy into a system, secure any parts of the
system connected to the operating range to prevent access and ensure that
no-one can be injured if, for example, motors start up unexpectedly.
3.2 Setting the menu language
When you switch on easy for the first time, you will be asked to select the
menu language.
▶Use the cursor buttons Í or Ú to select the language required.
•English
•Deutsch
•French
•Spanish
•Italian
•Portuguese
•Dutch
•Swedish
•Polish
•Turkish
•Czech
•Hungarian
▶Press OK to confirm your choice and press ESC to exit the menu.
ENGLISH å
DEUTSCH
FRANCAIS
ESPANOL
3 Placing into operation
3.3 operating modes
52 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
The device will then switch to the status display.
3.3 operating modes
easy has two operating modes - RUN and STOP.
In RUN mode easy continuously processes a stored circuit diagram until you
select STOP or disconnect the power. The circuit diagram, parameters and
the easy settings are retained in the event of a power failure. All you will
have to do is reset the real-time clock after the back-up time has elapsed.
Circuit diagram entry is only possible in STOP mode.
When a memory card with a circuit diagram is fitted in an easy model with an
LCD display, this circuit diagram will not start automatically if there is circuit
diagram in the device. The circuit diagram must first be transferred from the
memory card to the easy unit.
In RUN mode easy-X models load the circuit diagram on the memory card
automatically and run it immediately.
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
The following small circuit diagram takes you step by step through wiring up
your first easy circuit diagram. In this way you will learn all the rules, quickly
enabling you to use easy for your own projects.
As with conventional wiring, you use contacts and relays in the easy circuit
diagram. With easy, however, you no longer have to connect up components
individually. At the push of a few buttons, the easy circuit diagram produces
all the wiring. All you have to do is then connect any switches, sensors,
lamps or contactors you wish to use.
￫You can change the language setting at a later time,
(￫Section "5.2 Changing the menu language“, page 167).
If you do not set the language, easy will display this menu and
wait for you to select a language every time you switch on.
WARNING
In RUN mode easy will immediately run the saved circuit
diagram in the unit when the power supply is switched on. This
will happen unless STOP mode was set as startup mode. In
RUN mode outputs are activated according to the switch logic
of the circuit diagram.
3 Placing into operation
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 53
Figure 37: Lamp controller with relays
In the following example, easy carries out all the wiring and performs the
tasks of the circuit diagram shown below.
Figure 38: Lamp control using easy
E1
L01-
S1
S2
L01+
F1
Q1
Q1
12
Q1
E1
L01-
S1 S2
L01+
L01-
F1
+24V 0V I1 I2
3 Placing into operation
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
54 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
3.4.0.1 Starting point: Status display
easy activates the status display after it is powered up. The status display
indicates the switching state of the inputs and outputs and whether easy is
already running a circuit diagram.
▶Press OK to switch to the main menu.
Press OK to switch to the next menu level, and press ESC to move one level
back.
In this case easy must be in STOP mode.
▶Press OK 2 × to enter the circuit diagram display via menu items
PROGRAM… h PROGRAM. This is where you will create the circuit
diagram.
3.4.1 Circuit diagram display
The circuit diagram display is currently empty. The cursor flashes at the top
left, which is where you will start to wire your circuit diagram. easy will
automatically propose the first contact I1.
Use the ÍÚ úí cursor buttons to move the cursor over the invisible circuit
diagram grid.
The first three double columns are the contact fields and the right-hand
columns form the coil field. Each line is a rung. easy automatically energizes
the first contact to voltage.
▶Now try to wire up the following easy circuit diagram.
The switches I1 and I2 are at the input whilst I1 and I2 are the contacts for
the input terminals. Relay K1 is represented by the relay coil ÄQ1. The symbol
Ä identifies the coil's function, in this case a relay coil acting as a contactor.
Q1 is one of up to eight easy output relays in the basic unit.
...........…
… I…
MO 02:00
.......STOP
￫The examples were written without the use of expansion units.
If an expansion unit is connected, the Status display will first
show the status of the basic unit and then the status of the
expansion unit before showing the first selection menu.
PROGRAM...
STOP å RUN
PARAMETER
INFO
￫OK has two other functions:
•Press OK to save modified settings.
•In the circuit diagram, you can also press OK to insert and
modify contacts and relay coils.
Â
êê êê êê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
↑
→
↓
←
I1-I2----ÄQ1
3 Placing into operation
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 55
3.4.2 From the first contact to the output coil
With easy, you work from the input to the output. The first input contact is
I1.
▶Press OK.
easy inserts the first contact I1 at the cursor position.
▶The I flashes and can be changed, for example, to a P for a button input
by using the cursor buttons Í or Ú. However, nothing needs to be
changed at this point.
▶Press OK 2 ×, to move the cursor across the 1 to the second contact
field.
You could also move the cursor to the next contact field using the cursor
button í.
▶Press OK.
Again, easy creates a contact I1 at the cursor position. Change the contact
number to I2 so that N/C contact S2 can be connected to input terminal I2.
▶Press OK so that the cursor jumps to the next position and use cursor
buttons Í or Ú to change the number 2.
▶Press OK to move the cursor to the third contact field.
You do not need a third relay contact, so you can now wire the contacts
directly up to the coil field.
3.4.3 Wiring
easy displays a small wiring arrow in the circuit diagram for creating the
wiring.
Press ALT to activate the arrow and press the cursor buttons ÍÚ úí to
move it.
I1 êê êê êêê
I1 I1 êê êêê
￫Press DEL to delete a contact at the cursor position.
I1-I2 Â
￫ALT also has two other functions depending on the cursor
position:
•From the left contact field, press ALT to insert a new, empty
rung.
•The contact under the cursor can be changed between a
N/O and N/C contact by pressing the ALT button.
3 Placing into operation
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
56 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
The wiring arrow works between contacts and relays. When you move the
arrow onto a contact or relay coil, it changes back to the cursor and can be
reactivated if required.
▶Press ALT to wire the cursor from I2 through to the coil field.
The cursor changes into a flashing wiring arrow and automatically jumps to
the next logical wiring position.
▶Press the cursor button í. Contact I2 will be connected up to the coil
field.
▶Press the cursor button í once more.
The cursor will move to the coil field.
▶Press OK.
easy will insert relay coil Q1. The specified coil function Ä and the output relay
Q1 are correct and do not have to be changed.
Your first working easy circuit diagram now looks like this:
Press ESC to leave the circuit diagram display.
The adjacent menu will appear.
▶Press OK.
The circuit diagram is now automatically saved. CANCEL exits the circuit
diagram. Changes that have been made to the circuit diagram are not saved.
Once you have connected pushbutton actuators S1 and S2, you can test your
circuit diagram straight away.
êê êê êêê
êê êêê
↑
→
↓
←l
￫easy automatically wires adjacent contacts in a rung up to the
coil.
I1-I2l
êê êê êê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
￫You can use DEL to erase a connection at the cursor or arrow
position. Where connections intersect, the vertical connections
are deleted first, then, if you press DEL again, the horizontal
connections are deleted.
I1-I2----ÄQ1
I1-I2----ÄQ1
SAVE
CANCEL
￫easy saves all the necessary circuit diagram and program data
retentively in the internal data memory.
3 Placing into operation
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 57
3.4.4 Testing the circuit diagram
▶Switch with ESC to the main menu and select the STOP å RUN menu
option.
With STOP RUN å and STOP å RUN you switch to the RUN or STOP
operating modes.
easy is in RUN mode if the tick is present at the corresponding menu item.
i.e. STOP RUN å.
▶Press OK.
The tick changes to "STOP RUN å"
The Status display shows the current mode and the switching states of the
inputs and outputs.
▶Change to the Status display by pressing ESC and press pushbutton
actuator S1.
The contacts for inputs I1 and I2 are activated and relay Q1 picks up.
3.4.4.1 Power Flow Display
easy allows you to check rungs in RUN mode. This means that you can
check your circuit diagram via the built-in power flow display while it is being
processed by easy.
▶Switch to the circuit diagram display (confirm PROGRAM menu with OK) and
actuate pushbutton S1.
The relay picks up and easy displays the power flow.
▶Press pushbutton actuator S2, that has been connected as the N/C
contact.
The power flow is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out.
Press ESC to return to the Status display.
PROGRAM.. .Æ
STOP åRUN
PARAMETERS..
INFO... æ
￫The tick next to a menu item indicates which operating mode or
function is currently active.
PROGRAM.. .Æ
STOP RUN å
PARAMETERS..
INFO... æ
12..........
I
MO 02:00
1....... RUN
I1-I2----ÄQ1
I1-I2----ÄQ1
￫A circuit diagram does not have to be completed before you can
test parts of it with easy.
easy simply ignores any incomplete wiring that is not yet
working and only uses the finished wiring.
3 Placing into operation
3.4 Creating your first circuit diagram
58 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
3.4.5 Deleting the circuit diagram
▶Switch easy to STOP mode.
The display shows STOP å RUN.
▶Use PROGRAM... to switch from the main menu to the next menu level.
▶Select DELETE PROG.
easy will display the prompt DELETE?.
▶Press OK to delete the program or ESC to cancel.
Press ESC to return to the Status display.
3.4.6 Fast circuit diagram entry
You can create a circuit diagram in several ways: The first option is to enter
the elements in the circuit and then to wire all the elements together. The
other option is to use the enhanced operator guidance of easy and create the
circuit diagram in one go, from the first contact through to the last coil.
If you use the first option, you will have to select some of the elements in
order to create and connect up your circuit diagram.
The second, faster option is what you learned in the example. In this case
you create the entire rung from left to right.
￫easy must be in STOP mode in order to extend, delete or
modify the circuit diagram.
PROGRAM
DELETE PROG
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 59
4 Wiring with
By working through the example in chapter 3 you should now have gained an
initial impression of just how simple it is to create a circuit diagram in easy.
This chapter describes the technical overview of easy functions and provides
further examples of how to use easy.
4.1 -operation
4.1.1 Buttons for editing circuit diagrams and function relays
4.1.2 Operation
The cursor buttons in the easy circuit diagram perform three functions. The
current mode is indicated by the appearance of the flashing cursor.
•Move
•Enter
•Connecting
In Move mode, use ÍÚ úí to position the cursor on the circuit diagram in
order to select a rung, a contact or a relay coil.
Use OK to switch to Entry mode so that you can enter or change a value at
the current cursor position. If you press ESC in Entry mode, easy will undo
the most recent changes.
Press ALT to switch to Connect mode for wiring contacts and relays. Press
ALT again to return to Move.
Delete rung, contact, relay or empty rung in
the circuit diagram
Toggle between N/C and N/O contact
Connect contacts, relays and rungs
Add rungs,
ÍÚ
úí
Change value
Move cursor up/down
Change place
Cursor left/right
Cursor buttons set as P buttons:
ú
íInput P1,
Input P3,
Í
ÚInput P2
Input P4
Undo setting from last OK
Leave current display, menu
Change, add new contact/relay,
Save setting
â
I 1
l
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
60 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Press ESC to exit the circuit diagram and parameter display.
4.1.2.1 Opening the parameter display for function relays with contacts or coils
If you specify the contact or coil of a function relay in Entry mode, easy
automatically switches from the contact number to the function relay
parameter display when you press OK.
Press í to switch to the next contact or coil field without entering any
parameters.
4.1.2.2 Program
A program is a sequence of commands which easy executes cyclically in
RUN mode. An easy program consists of the necessary settings for the
device, password, system settings, a circuit diagram and/or function relays.
4.1.2.3 Circuit Diagram
The circuit diagram is that part of the program where the contacts are
connected together. In RUN mode a coil is switched on and off in accordance
with the current flow and the coil function specified.
4.1.2.4 Function Relays
Function relays are program elements with special functions. Example:
timing relays, time switches, counters. Function relays are elements
provided with or without contacts and coils as required. In RUN mode the
function relays are processed according to the circuit diagram and the results
are updated accordingly.
•Examples:
Timing relay = function relay with contacts and coils
Time switch = function relay with contacts
4.1.2.5 Relay
Relays are switching devices which are electronically simulated in easy. They
actuate their contacts according to their designated function. A relay consists
of at least one coil and contact.
￫easy performs many of these cursor movements automatically.
For example, easy switches the cursor to Move mode if no
further entries or connections are possible at the selected
cursor position.
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 61
4.1.2.6 Contacts
You modify the power flow with the contacts in the easy circuit diagram.
Contacts such as N/O contacts are set to 1 when they are closed and 0 when
they are opened. Every contact in the easy circuit diagram can be defined as
either an N/O contact or an N/C contact.
4.1.2.7 Coils
Coils are the actuating mechanisms of relays. In RUN mode, the results of
the wiring are sent to the coils, which switch on or off accordingly. Coils can
have seven different coil functions.
Table 6: Usable contacts
Easy works with different contacts, which can be used in any order in the
contact fields of the circuit diagram.
Contact easy representation
N/O contact,
Open in the rest state
I, Q, M, N, A, Ö, Y, C, T, O, P, :, D, S, R, Z
Break contact,
Closed in the rest state
I, Q, M, N, A, ö, Y, C, T, O, P, D, S, R, Z
￫To ensure compatibility with easy400 and easy600 devices,
each easy500 and easy700 is provided logically with all possible
contacts. The switching state is always zero if contacts are not
supported by the device, i.e.
•devices without a clock. The contacts (N/O contact) of the
time switches are always set to logic 0.
The advantage of this process is that you can use the same
circuit diagram on all easy500, easy700, easy-AB, easy-AC,
easy-DA and easy-DC devices.
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
62 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Table 7: Contacts
Switching contact N/O N/C easy500 easy700 Page
Analog value comparator function
relay
AAA1…A16 A1…A16 82
Counter function relays CCC1…C16 C1…C16 94
Text marker function relay DDD1…D16 D1…D16 109
Week time switch function relay Ö ö Ö1…Ö8 Ö1…Ö8 113
easy input terminal III1…I8 I1…I12 66
0 signal I13 I13
Expansion status –I14 194
Short-Circuit/Overload I16 I15…I16 194
Markers, (auxiliary relay) MMM1…M16 M1…M16 72
Markers (auxiliary relay) NNN1…N16 N1…N16 72
Operating Hours Counter OOO1…O4 O1…O4 118
Cursor button PPP1…P4 P1…P4 70
easy output QQQ1…Q4 Q1…Q8 66
Input terminal for expansion unit RR–R1…R12 66
Short-circuit/overload with
expansion
RR–R15…R16 194
easy output
(expansion or S auxiliary marker)
SSS1…S8
(as marker)
S1…S8 72
Timer function relays TTT1…T16 T1…T16 122
Jump label :–:1…:8 :1…:8 135
Year Time Switch YYY1…Y8 Y1…Y8 137
Master reset, (central reset) ZZZ1…Z3 Z1…Z3 147
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 63
4.1.3 Relays, function relays
easy has nine different types of relay for wiring in a circuit diagram.
You can set the switching behavior of these relays by means of the coil
functions and parameters selected.
The options for setting output and marker relays are listed with the
description of each coil function.
The coil functions and parameters are listed with the description of each
function relay.
￫In order to ensure compatibility with the easy400 and easy600
devices, each easy500 and easy700 logically supports all relay
types internally. If a relay type is not supported by the device,
the switching state of the contacts is always set to zero, i.e.
•devices without a clock. The contacts (N/O contact) of the
time switches are always set to logic 0.
The advantage of this process is that you can use the same
circuit diagram on all easy500, easy700, easy-AB, easy-AC,
easy-DA and easy-DC devices. Furthermore, you can use
outputs that are not physically present as markers.
Relay easy
display
easy500 easy700 Coil
function
Param
eters
Analog value comparator function relay A A1…A16 A1…A16 – ✓
Counter function relays C C1…C16 C1…C16 ✓ ✓
Text marker function relay D D1…D16 D1…D16 ✓ ✓
Week time switch function relay Ö Ö1…Ö4 Ö1…Ö4 – ✓
Markers (auxiliary relay) M M1…M16 M1…M16 ✓–
Markers (auxiliary relay) N N1…N16 N1…N16 ✓–
Operating Hours Counter O O1…O4 O1…O4 ✓ ✓
easy output relays Q Q1…Q8 Q1…Q8 ✓–
easy output relay expansion, auxiliary
markers
S S1…S8
(as marker)
S1…S8 ✓–
Timer function relays T T1…T16 T1…T16 ✓ ✓
Conditional Jump : :1…:8 :1…:8 ✓–
Year Time Switch Y Y1…Y8 Y1…Y8 – ✓
Master reset, (central reset) Z Z1…Z3 Z1…Z3 ✓–
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
64 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.1.3.1 Circuit diagram display
In the easy circuit diagram, contacts and coils are connected up from left to
right - from the contact to the coil. The circuit diagram is created on a hidden
wiring grid containing contact fields, coil fields and rungs. It is then wired up
with connections.
•You can add switch contacts in the three contact fields. The first contact
field is automatically connected to the voltage.
•You add the relay coil to be controlled together with its function and
designation in the coil field.
•Each line in the circuit diagram represents a rung. Up to 128 rungs can
be wired in a circuit diagram.
Connections are used to produce the electrical contact between switch
contacts and the coils. They can be created across several rungs. Each point
of intersection is a connection.
Contact
fields
Coil Field
Rungs
￫The circuit diagram display performs two functions:
•In STOP mode it is used to edit the circuit diagram.
•In RUN mode it is used to check the circuit diagram using
the Power flow display.
I1-I2uT1-ÄQ1
Q1-Ö1kêê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
êê êê êê êêê
Connections
4 Wiring with
4.1 -operation
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 65
4.1.4 Saving and loading circuit diagrams
There are two ways of saving circuit diagrams in easy externally:
•Saving to a memory card
•Saving on a PC with the easySoft
programming software.
Once they have been saved, programs can be reloaded into easy, edited and
run.
All circuit diagram data is saved in easy. In the event of a power failure the data
will be retained until the next time it is overwritten or deleted.
4.1.4.1 Memory card
Each EASY-M-32K memory card contains a circuit diagram which is inserted
into the easy interface. The program is stored retentively on the memory
card.
The way the memory card works and a description of how to transfer a
program to the card, (￫Section "6.7 Memory card“, page 197)
4.1.4.2 Soft
easySoft-Basic and easySoft-Pro are PC programs for creating, testing and
managing easy circuit diagrams.
Completed circuit diagrams are transferred between your PC and easy via
the connecting cable. Once you have transferred a circuit diagram, simply run
easy straight from your PC.
Details on the program and transferring circuit diagrams, (￫Section
"6.8 Soft“, page 200).
￫EASY-M-8K memory cards of easy400 devices can be read in
easy500. Memory cards of easy400 EASY-M-8K and easy600
EASY-M16K devices can be read in easy700.
Write operations from easy500 and easy700 are only possible to
the EASY-M32K memory card.
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
66 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
In easy circuit diagrams, the switches, buttons and relays of conventional
circuit diagrams are connected up using input contacts and relay coils.
4.2.1 Input and output contacts
First specify which input and output terminals you wish to use in your circuit.
Depending on the type and configuration, easy has 8, 12 or 24 input
terminals and 4, 6, 8, 10 or 16 outputs. The signal states at the input
terminals are evaluated in the circuit diagram with the input contacts I1 to
I12. R1 to R12 are input contacts of the expansion. The outputs are
connected in the circuit diagram with the output relays Q1 to Q8 or S1 to S8
(expansion).
4.2.1.1 Entering and changing contacts and relay coils
A switch contact is selected in easy via the contact name and contact
number.
A relay coil is defined by its coil function, name and number.
Values for contacts and coil fields are changed in Entry mode. The value to
be changed flashes.
▶Move the cursor using the buttons úí ÍÚ to a contact or coil field.
▶Press OK to switch to Entry mode.
Hardwired easy circuit diagram
easy terminal
Connect N/O contact S1 to easy input
terminal I2
N/O contact S2 to input terminal I3
Connect load E1 to easy output Q4
S1 or S2 switch on E1.
easy circuit diagram
E1
S1
Q1
Q1
S2
I2u------ÄQ4
I3k
I2
Contact name
Contact number
Coil Function
Relay name
Relay number
ÄQ4
￫A full list of all the contacts and relays is given in the overview
starting on page 61.
I1
￫If the field is empty, easy will enter contact I1 or the coil ÄQ1.
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 67
▶Use ú to select the position you wish to change, or press OK to jump to
the next position.
▶Use ÍÚ to modify the value of the position.
easy will leave Entry mode when you press úí or OK to leave a contact field
or coil field.
4.2.1.2 Deleting contacts and relay coils
▶Move the cursor using the buttons úí ÍÚ to a contact or coil field.
▶Press DEL.
The contact or the relay coil will be deleted, together with any connections.
Change I1 to I2 in
the contact field
Change ÄQ1 to ÄQ8
in the coil field
I1I1I2ÄQ1 ÄQ1ÄQ1ÄQ8
qí or
OK 2Í ÅúMí or
OK 2Ú
M3 èN3
N4 ÈC4
A5 äT5
Ö.S
O.
Y. R:.
C. D.
T. S.
OZ1
P1
22
:
D
Sí or
OK í or
OK
R
Z
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
68 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.2.1.3 Changing N/O contacts to N/C contacts
Every switch contact in the easy circuit diagram can be defined as either the
N/O contact or the N/C contact.
▶Switch to Entry mode and move the cursor over the contact name.
▶Press ALT. The N/O contact will change to a N/C contact.
▶Press OK twice to confirm the change.
Figure 39: Changing contact I3 from N/O to N/C
4.2.2 Creating and modifying connections
You connect switch contacts and relay coils with the wiring arrow in Connect
mode. In this mode easy displays the cursor as an arrow.
▶Use úí ÍÚ to move the cursor to the contact or coil field from which
you wish to create a connection.
▶Press ALT to switch to Connect mode.
▶Use úí to move the diagonal arrow between the contact fields and coil
fields and ÍÚ to move between circuit connections.
▶Press ALT to leave Connect mode.
easy will leave the mode automatically when you move the diagonal arrow
onto a contact field or coil field which has already been assigned.
Never work backwards, ( ￫section “6.1.1.2 Example: Do not wire
backwards”, page 188).
When wiring more than three contacts in series, use an M or N marker.
2 x
I2u------ÄQ4
I3k
I2u------ÄQ4
I3k
I2u------ÄQ4
I3kê
￫Do not position the cursor on the first contact field. At this
position the ALT button has a different function (Insert rung).
￫In a rung, easy automatically connects switch contacts and the
connection to the relay coil if there are no empty fields in-
between.
I1-Q4-I3o
z-----k
hI2-I4-ÄQ2
I1-Q4-I3-ÄM1
I2-I4-M1-ÄQ2
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 69
4.2.2.1 Deleting Connections
▶Move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field to the right of the
connection that you want to delete. Press ALT to switch to Connect
mode.
▶Press DEL.
easy will delete a connection. Closed adjacent connections will be retained.
If several rungs are connected to one another, easy first deletes the vertical
connection. If you press DEL again, it will delete the horizontal connection as
well.
Close the delete operation with ALT or by moving the cursor to a contact or
coil field.
4.2.3 Inserting and deleting a rung
The easy circuit diagram shows four of the 128 rungs in the display at the
same time. If you move the cursor past the top or bottom of the display, easy
automatically scrolls up or down the display to show hidden rungs – even
empty ones.
A new rung is added below the last connection. or inserted above the cursor
position:
▶Position the cursor on the first contact field of a circuit connection.
▶Press ALT.
The existing rung with all its additional connections is “shifted” downwards.
The cursor is then positioned directly in the new rung.
4.2.3.1 Delete Rung
easy will only remove empty rungs, i.e. those without contacts or coils.
▶Delete all the contacts and relay coils from the rung.
▶Position the cursor on the first contact field of the empty rung.
▶Press DEL.
The subsequent rung(s) will be “pulled up” and any existing links between
rungs will be retained.
￫You cannot delete connections that easy has created
automatically.
I2u------ÄQ4
I3k
I2u------ÄQ4
 n
I3k
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
70 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.2.4 Switching with the Cursor Buttons
With easy, you can also use the four cursor buttons as hard-wired inputs in
the circuit diagram.
The buttons are wired in the circuit diagram as contacts P1 to P4. The P
buttons can be activated and deactivated in the System menu.
The P buttons can also be used for testing circuits or manual operation. The
button function is a useful addition for service and commissioning tasks.
Example 1:
A lamp at output relay Q1 is switched on and off via inputs I1 and I2 or using
cursor buttons Í Ú.
Example 2:
Terminal I1 is used to control output relay Q1. Terminal I5 switches to Cursor
button mode and deactivates rung I1 via M1.
The Status menu display shows whether the P buttons are used in the circuit
diagram.
•P: button function wired and active.
•P2: button function wired, active and P2 button Í pressed
•P-: button function wired and not active.
•Empty field: P buttons not used.
P1
P2
P3
P4
I1u------SQ1
P2k
I2u------RQ1
P4k
I5-------ÄM1
I1-M1u---ÄQ1
P1-M1k
￫The P buttons are only detected as switches in the Status
menu. The cursor buttons are used for other functions in the
menus, the power flow display and in the text display.
............
IP2
FR 15:59
........STOP
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 71
4.2.5 Checking the circuit diagram
easy contains a built-in measuring device enabling you to monitor the
switching states of contacts and relay coils during operation.
▶Complete the small parallel connection and switch easy to RUN mode via
the main menu.
▶Return to the circuit diagram display.
You are now unable to edit the circuit diagram.
The circuit diagram display performs two functions depending on the mode:
•STOP: Creation of the circuit diagram
•RUN: Power flow display
▶Switch on I3.
In the power flow display, energized connections are thicker than non-
energized connections.
You can follow energized connections across all rungs by scrolling the display
up and down.
I2---u---ÄQ4
I3---k
￫If you switch to the circuit diagram display and are unable to
modify a circuit diagram, first check whether easy is in STOP
mode.
I2---U---ÄQ4
I3---k
￫The power flow display will not show signal fluctuations in the
millisecond range. This is due to the inherent delay factor of
LCD displays.
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
72 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.2.6 Coil Functions
You can set the coil function to determine the switching behavior of relay
coils. The following coil functions are available for relays Q, M, S, D, “:”:
Table 8: Coil Function
Marker relays M and N are used as a flag. The S relay can be used as the
output of an expansion unit or as a marker if no expansion unit is connected.
The only difference between them and the output relay Q is that they have
no output terminals.
Circuit diagram display easy display Coil function Example
ÄContactor Function ÄQ1, ÄD2, ÄS4, Ä:1,
ÄM7
ÅContactor function with
negated result
ÅQ1, ÅD2, ÅS4
èCycle pulse on falling
edge
èQ3, èM4, èD8, èS7
ÈCycle pulse on rising edge ÈQ4, ÈM5, ÈD7, ÈS3
äSurge function äQ3, äM4, äD8, äS7
SLatch (set) SQ8, SM2, SD3, SS4
RReset (unlatching) RQ4, RM5, RD7, RS3
￫The coil functions of the function relays are described in the
descriptions for the appropriate relays.
￫The coil functions Ä, Å, è, È, (contactor, contactor negated, cycle
pulse negative, rising edge) must only be used once for each
relay coil. The last coil in the circuit diagram determines the
status of the relay.
When controlling a contactor or relay, the control coil is only
present once. If you are creating parallel circuits, use Set, Reset
as a coil function.
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 73
4.2.6.1 Rules for wiring relay coils
To ensure a clear overview of all relay states only assign the same coil
function once to a relay (ä, S, R). However, retentive coil functions such as ä,
S, R can be used several times if required by the circuit diagram logic.
Exception: When using jumps to structure a circuit diagram, this coil function
can also be used effectively several times.
4.2.6.2 Relay with contactor function Ä
The output signal follows the input signal directly, the relay operates as a
contactor.
Figure 40: Signal diagram, contactor function
Representation in easy:
•Output relays Q: ÄQ1 to ÄQ8 (depending on type)
•Markers M, N: ÄM1 to ÄM16, ÄN1 to ÄN16
•Function relays (Text) D: ÄD1 to ÄD16
•Output relays S: ÄS1 to ÄS8
•Jumps: Ä:1 to Ä:8
on
on
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
74 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.2.6.3 Contactor function with negated result (inverse contactor function) Å
The output signal is simply an inversion of the input signal; the relay operates
like a contactor with contacts that have been negated. If the coil is triggered
with the state 1, the coil switches its N/O contacts to the state 0.
Figure 41: Signal diagram, inverted contactor function
Representation in easy:
•Output relays Q: ÅQ1 to ÅQ8 (depending on type)
•Markers M, N: ÅM1 to ÅM16, ÅN1 to ÅN16
•Function relays (Text) D: ÅD1 to ÅD16
•Output relays S: ÅS1 to ÅS8
•Jumps: Å:1 to Å:8
4.2.6.4 Falling edge evaluation (cycle pulse) è
This function is used if the coil is only meant to switch on a falling edge. With
a drop-out in the coil state from 1 to 0, the coil switches its N/O contacts to
the 1 state for one cycle.
Figure 42: Signal diagram, cycle pulse on falling edge
Representation in easy:
•Markers M, N: èM1 to èM16, èN1 to èN16
•Jumps: è:1 to è:8
on
on
￫Physical outputs should not be used as a cycle pulse is
generated.
on
on
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 75
4.2.6.5 Rising edge evaluation (cycle pulse) È
This function is used if the coil is only meant to switch on a rising edge. With
a change in the coil state from 0 to 1, the coil switches its N/O contacts to
the 1 state for one cycle time.
Figure 43: Signal diagram, cycle pulse on rising edge
Representation in easy:
•Markers M, N: ÈM1 ÈM16, ÈN1to ÈN16
•Jumps: È:1to È:8
4.2.6.6 Impulse relay ä
The relay coil switches whenever the input signal changes from 0 to 1. The
relay behaves like an impulse relay.
Figure 44: Signal diagram, impulse relay
Representation in easy:
•Output relay Q: äQ1 to äQ8 (depending on type)
•Markers M: äM1to äM16
•Function relays (Text) D: äD1to äD8
•Relays S: äS1 to äS8
￫Physical outputs should not be used as a cycle pulse is
generated.
on
on
￫A coil is automatically switched off in the event of a power
failure and in STOP mode. Exception: Retentive coils retain
signal 1 (￫Section "5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage)“,
page 181).
on
on
4 Wiring with
4.2 Working with contacts and relays
76 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.2.6.7 Latching relay
The “latch” and “unlatch” relay functions are used in pairs. The relay picks
up when latched and remains in this state until it is reset by the “unlatch”
function.
:
Figure 45: Latching relay signal diagram
• Range A: The Set coil and the Reset coil are triggered at different times
• Range B: Reset coil is triggered at the same time as the Set coil
• Range C: Power supply switched off
Representation in easy:
•Q output relays: SQ1 to SQ8, RQ1 to RQ8 (depending on type)
•M markers: SM1 to SM16, RM1 to RM16
•(Text) D function relays: SD1 to SD8, RD1 to RD8
•Relays S: SS1 to SS8, RS1 to RS8
Use each of the two relay functions
S
and
R
once only per relay.
If both coils are triggered at the same time, priority is given to the coil further
down in the circuit diagram. This is shown in the above signal diagram in
section B.
on
on
S
R
on
AB C
I1-I2----SQ1
I2-------RQ1
￫A latched relay is automatically switched off if the power fails or
if the device is in STOP mode. Exception: Retentive coils retain
signal 1 (￫Section "5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage)“,
page 181).
4 Wiring with
4.3 Function Relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 77
4.3 Function Relays
Function relays allow you to simulate the functions of different conventional
control engineering devices in your circuit diagram. easy provides the
following function relays:
Table 9: Function Relays
A function relay is started via its relay coil or by evaluating a parameter. It
switches the contact of the function relay according to its function and the
set parameters.
easy circuit diagram symbol Function Relays
A1, A2 Analog value comparator, threshold value switch (only useful for devices with
an analog input)
C1, CC1, DC1, RC1 Counter relay, up/down counter, high-speed counter, frequency counter
D2, ÄD2 Text, output user-defined texts, enter values
Ö1, Ö2Time switch, weekday/time
O1, ÄO2 Operating hours counter with limit value entry
T1, TT1, RT1, HT1
X, ?X
Timing relay, on-delayed
Timing relay, on-delayed with random switching
T1, TT1, RT1, HT1
â, ?â
Timing relay, off-delayed
Timing relay, off-delayed with random switching
T6, TT6, RT6, HT6
Xâ, ?Xâ
Timing relay, on/off-delayed
Timing relay, on/off delayed with random switching
T2, TT2, RT2, HT2
ü
Timing relay, single pulse
T3, TT3, RT3, HT3
Ü
Timing relay, flashing
:2, Ä:2 Jump
Y3 Year time switch, date
Z1, Z3 Master reset, central reset of outputs, markers
￫Current actual values are cleared if the power supply is
switched off or if easy is switched to STOP mode. Exception:
Retentive coils keep their logic state (￫Section "5.9 Retention
(non-volatile data storage)“, page 181).
CAUTION
The following applies to RUN mode: easy processes the
function relays after a pass through the circuit diagram.The last
state of the coils is used for this. This takes the last status of the
coils into account. Only use the coil of a function relay once.
Exception: When working with jumps, the same coil can be
used several times.
4 Wiring with
4.3 Function Relays
78 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.3.1 Example: with function relay timer and counter relay
A warning light flashes when the counter reaches 10. The example shows
function relays C1 and T1. The S1 pushbutton actuator is used for the count
signal. The S2 pushbutton actuator resets counter P1.
Figure 46: Hardwiring with relays
The wiring of the easy relay looks as follows.
Figure 47: easy wiring and circuit diagram
The counter P1 is called C1 in easy.
The timing relay K1T is called T1 in easy.
▶Complete the circuit diagram up to CC1.
CC1 is the count coil of the counter 1 function relay.
▶Move the cursor onto the 1 of CC1 and press OK.
The parameter set for the counter is displayed.
L01–
P1
P1
K1T
K1T
CR
E1
S1 S2
L01+
2s
Zähler
Wert 10
I5-------CC1
I6-------RC1
C1-------TT1
T1-------ÄQ1
12
E1
L01–
S2
L01+
L01–
+24 V 0 V I5 I6
S1
Q 1
I5-------CC1
￫Press OK to call up the easy parameter display.
4 Wiring with
4.3 Function Relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 79
▶Press the cursor button until the cursor is on the plus sign on the right of
the S (setpoint value).
▶Press the OK button.
▶Press the í button.
▶Use í to move the cursor onto the tens digit.
▶Use Í Ú to modify the value of the digit.
▶Confirm the value input with OK.
▶Press ESC to return to the circuit diagram, the setpoint 0010 will be
stored.
▶Enter the circuit diagram up to coil TT1 of the timing relay. Set the
parameter for T1.
The timing relay operates as a flash relay. The easy symbol for the flasher/
blink relay is Ü. It is set at the top left of the parameter display. S means here
the time base second.
▶Select the Ü symbol by pressing the Ú button.
▶Use the í to move to the first time setpoint I1.
C1 N +
S +0
C1 N +
S 00000
C1 N +
S 00010
C1 N +
S 00010
I5-------CC1
Í
￫easy has specific parameter displays for function relays. The
meaning of these parameters is explained under each relay
type.
I5-------CC1
I6-------RC1
C1-------TT1
T1 X S +
I1 +0
I2 +0
T:
T1 Ü S +
I1 +0
I2 +0
T:
T1 Ü S +
I1 +0
I2 +0
T:
4 Wiring with
4.3 Function Relays
80 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
▶Press the OK button.
▶Press the íbutton.
▶Use the Í Ú ú í buttons to enter the value 01.000.
▶Confirm with OK.
The time setpoint I1 for the pause time is 1 s
▶Use the Ú button to enter the value of the second setpoint value I2.
▶Set this value to 0.5 s.
This is the time value for the pulse time.
▶Press ESC to leave the parameter entry.
The values are now stored.
▶Complete the circuit diagram.
▶Press the ESC button.
▶Press OK to store the circuit diagram.
▶Test the circuit diagram with the power flow display.
▶Switch easy to RUN mode and return to the circuit diagram.
Each parameter set can be displayed using the power flow display for the
circuit diagram.
▶Move the cursor onto C1 and press OK.
The parameter set for the counter is displayed with actual and setpoint
values.
▶Switch I5. The actual value changes.
This is represented in the easy parameter display. In the last line C: 0007
the counter actual value is = 7.
If the actual value is greater than or equal to the setpoint (10), the left
character on the bottom row will change to â. The contact of counter C1
switches.
The counter contact triggers the timing relay. This causes the warning light
to flash at output Q1.
T1 Ü S +
I1 00.000
I2 +0
T:
T1 Ü S +
I1 01,000
I2 +0
T:
T1 Ü S +
I1 01,000
I2 00.50
T:
I5-------CC1
I6-------RC1
C1-------TT1
T1-------ÄQ1
SAVE
CANCEL
C1 N +
S 0010
# C:0000
C1 N +
S 0010
# C:0007
C1 N +
S 0010
â C:0010
4 Wiring with
4.3 Function Relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 81
Power flow of the circuit diagram
Doubling the flashing frequency:
▶In the power flow display select T1.
▶Press OK.
▶Change the set time I1 to 00.500 and I2 to 00.250 (0.5 and 0.25
s).
▶The set time will be accepted as soon as you press OK.
The character on the left of the bottom row will indicate whether the contact
has switched or not.
•# Contact has not switched (N/O contact open).
•â Contact has switched (N/O contact closed).
You can also modify parameter settings via the PARAMETER menu option.
I5-------CC1
I6-------RC1
C1=======TT1
T1=======ÄQ1
T1 Ü S +
S1 00.50
S2 00.25
â T:00.200
￫If you want to prevent other people from modifying the
parameters, change the access enable symbol from + to –
when creating the circuit diagram and setting parameters. You
can then protect the circuit diagram with a password.
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
82 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
easy provides 16 analog comparators A1 to A16 for use as required. These
can also be used as threshold value switches or comparators.
An analog value comparator or threshold value switch enables you to
compare analog input values with a setpoint, the actual value of another
function relay or another analog input. This enables you to implement small
controller tasks such as two-point controllers very easily.
All easy-AB, easy-DA and easy-DC devices are provided with analog inputs.
•The analog inputs of the easy500 are I7 and I8.
•The analog inputs of the easy700 are I7, I8, I11 and I12
A1…A16 analog value comparator
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
A.. 1 if the selected actual
value/setpoint
condition is fulfilled.
I1 Comparison value 1
F1 Gain factor for I1 (I1 = F1 *
value)
I2 Comparison value 2
F2 Gain factor for I2 (I2 = F2 *
value)
OS Offset for the value at I1,
I1OS = OS + actual value at I1
HY Switch hysteresis for value at
I2 (value HY is used for both
positive and negative
hysteresis.)
￫Compatibility with easy400 and easy600
If you are loading an existing easy400 or easy600 circuit
diagram, the existing comparison functions and values are
retained. The analog value comparison function relay works in
easy500 and easy700 and in easy400, easy600. The setpoints
are converted to the new resolution of the analog inputs. The
setpoint 5.0 (easy400, easy600) is converted to the setpoint 512
(easy500, easy700).
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 83
The following comparisons are possible:
Table 10: Comparison table
Table 11: Comparison examples:
Value at function relay
value input I1
Comparator functions Value at function relay
value input I2
Mode selection at
the function relay
Analog input I7, I8, I11, I12 Less than
Less than/equal to
Equal to
Greater than/equal
to
Greater than
LT
LE
EQ
GE
GT
Analog input I7, I8, I11, I12
Setpoint 0000 to 9999 Setpoint 0000 to 9999
Actual value of counter relay
C1 to C16
Actual value of counter relay
C1 to C16
Actual value of timing relay
T1 to T16
Actual value of timing relay
T1 to T16
A1 function relay Value input I1 A1 function relay Value input I2
I7 GE (greater than/equal to) I8
I7 LE (less than/equal to) I8
I7 GE (greater than/equal to) Setpoint
I7 LE (less than/equal to) Setpoint
I8 GE (greater than/equal to) Setpoint
I8 LE (less than/equal to) Setpoint
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
84 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.4.1 Circuit diagram display with analog value comparator
Analog value comparators are integrated as contacts in the circuit diagram.
In the circuit diagram above, I1 enables both analog value comparators. If a
value goes below the set value, A1 switches output Q1. If another value
exceeds the set value, A2 deactivates output Q1. A3 switches marker M1 on
and off.
Table 12: Parameter display and parameter set for analog value comparator:
4.4.2 Compatibility with 400 with500 and 600 with 700
New functions have been added to the parameter display of easy500 and
easy700. The easy400 and easy600 parameters can be found at the
following points.
I1uA1----SQ1
hA2----RQ1
A3-------ÄM1
A1 EQ +
I1 +0 Æ
F1 +0
I2 +0 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
A1 Analog value comparator function relay 1
EQ Equal mode
The function relay has the following modes:
•LT: less than
•LE: less than/equal to
•EQ: equal to
•GE: greater than/equal to
•GT:greater than
+ + appears in the PARAMETER menu.
- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
I1 Comparison value 1 (positive value I7, I8, I11, I12, actual value T1 to T16, C1 to C16)
F1 Gain factor for I1 (I1 = F1 x actual value at I1); F1 = positive value from 0 to 9999
I2 Comparison value 2 (positive value I7, I8, I11, I12, actual value T1 to T16, C1 to C16)
F2 Gain factor for I2 (I2 = F2 x actual value at I2); F2 = positive value from 0 to 9999
OS Offset for the value of I1 (I1 = OS + actual value at I1); OS = positive value from 0 to 9999
HY Switching hysteresis for value I2
Value HY applies both to positive and negative hysteresis.
•I2 = Actual value at I2 + HY;
•I2 = Actual value at I2 - HY;
•HY= positive value from 0 to 9999
￫Work normally with analog inputs and setpoints as the
parameters for the analog value comparator.
easy400/600-
Parameters
easy500/700-
Parameters
AA =I1 AA
BB =I2 BB
A1 =A1
+=+
>=GE
ANALOG
AAw g
n > dA1
BBy b +
A1 GE +
I1 AA Æ
F1 +0
I2 BB æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 85
4.4.3 Parameter display in RUN mode
Parameter display and parameter set for analog value comparator in RUN
mode with the display of the actual values:
￫The analog value comparator for easy500 and easy700 operates
internally in the value range:
–2147483648 to +2147483647
This ensures that the correct value is always calculated. This is
important for multiplying values (I1 x F1 or I2 x F2).
Example:
I1 = 9999, F1 = 9999
I1 x F1 = 99980001
The result is within the value range.
￫If no value is entered at F1 or F2, only the value at I1 and I2 is
used (no multiplication).
￫If the value of a control relay exceeds the value 9999, the value
of the counter is shown in the display of the analog value
comparator minus 10000.
Example: Counter actual value =10233
Display of the analog value comparator: 233 (10000 is displayed
as 0).
Actual value, e.g.: analog input
Factor is not used
Actual comparison value, e.g.: constant
Factor is not used
Offset is not used
The switching hysteresis is +/– 25
A1 EQ +
I1 0249 Æ
F1 0000
I2 0350 æ
F2 0000
OS 0000
HY 0025
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
86 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.4.4 Resolution of the analog inputs
The analog inputs I7, I8, and on the easy700 I11, I12 have the following
resolution.
The analog signal from 0 to 10 V DC is converted to a 10-bit digital value from
0 to 1023. A digital value of 100 represents an analog value of 1.0 V (exactly
0.98 V).
Figure 48: Resolution of the analog inputs
4.4.5 Function of the analog value comparator function relay
U [V]
5.0
512 1023
10.0
0
￫The GT, GE, LT, and LE comparison functions only differ in the
fact that GE and LE also switch when the value is equal to the
setpoint. easy400 and easy800 feature five comparison modes
so that all analog value comparators from easy500 to easy700
are compatible.
WARNING
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital
signals. Consequently, greater care must be taken when laying
and connecting the signal lines.
Set the switching hysteresis to a value so that interference
signals will not cause accidental switching. A value of 0.2 V
(value 20 without gain) must be observed as a safety value.
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 87
4.4.5.1 Function of the Less than comparison
Parameter display and parameter set for Less than analog value comparator.
Circuit diagram with analog value comparator.
Figure 49: Signal diagram of analog value comparator in Less than mode
1: actual value at I7
2: setpoint plus hysteresis value
3: setpoint
4: setpoint minus hysteresis
The N/O contact switches off when the actual value at I7 exceeds the setpoint
value plus hysteresis. If the actual value at I7 falls below the setpoint value, the
N/O contact switches on.
A1 LT +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0100 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A1-------ÄQ1
￫The values F1 +0, F2 +0 and OS +0 were not defined. A
gain is not used with any values. No offset is used.
on
off
1
2
3
4
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
88 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.4.5.2 Function of the Less than/equal to comparison
Parameter display and parameter set for Less than/equal to analog value
comparator.
Circuit diagram with analog value comparator.
Figure 50: Signal diagram of analog value comparator in Less than/equal to mode
1: actual value at I7
2: setpoint plus hysteresis value
3: setpoint
4: setpoint minus hysteresis
The N/O contact switches off when the actual value at I7 exceeds the
setpoint value plus hysteresis. If the actual value at I7 equals or falls below
the setpoint value, the N/O contact switches on.
A2 LE +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0100 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A2-------ÄQ1
￫The values F1 +0, F2 +0 and OS +0 were not defined. No
values are used with a gain factor, and no offset is used.
on
off
1
2
3
4
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 89
4.4.5.3 Function of the Equal to comparison
Parameter display and parameter set for Equal to analog value comparator.
Circuit diagram with analog value comparator.
Figure 51: Signal diagram of analog value comparator in Equal to mode
1: actual value at I8, multiplied with gain factor F2
2: setpoint plus hysteresis value
3: setpoint
4: setpoint minus hysteresis
The N/O contact switches on if the actual value at I8 (multiplied by F1)
reaches the configured setpoint value. If the actual value exceeds the
setpoint, the make contact switches off. The N/O contact switches on if the
actual value at I8 (multiplied by F1) reaches the configured setpoint value. If
the actual value falls below the setpoint value minus hysteresis, the N/O
contact switches off.
A8 EQ +
I1 I8 Æ
F1 0010
I2 3000 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0250
A8-------ÄQ3
￫The values F2 +0 and OS +0 were not defined. No values are
used with a gain factor, and no offset is used. A gain factor of 8
is used with the analog value at I10. The hysteresis is adjusted
accordingly.
on
off
1
2
3
4
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
90 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.4.5.4 Example: Function of the Greater than/equal to comparison
Parameter display and parameter set for Greater than/equal analog value
comparator.
Circuit diagram with analog value comparator.
Figure 52: Signal diagram of analog value comparator in Greater than/equal to mode
1: actual value at I7
2: setpoint plus hysteresis value
3: setpoint
4: setpoint minus hysteresis
The N/O contact switches if the actual value at I7 is equal to the setpoint
value. The N/O contact switches off when the actual value at I7 falls below
the setpoint minus hysteresis.
A5 GE +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0100 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A5-------ÄQ1
￫The values F1 +0, F2 +0 and OS +0 were not defined. No
values are used with a gain factor, and no offset is used.
on
off
1
2
3
4
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 91
4.4.5.5 Example: Function of the Greater than comparison
Parameter display and parameter set for Greater than analog value
comparator.
Circuit diagram with analog value comparator.
Figure 53: Signal diagram of analog value comparator in Greater than mode
1: actual value at I7
2: setpoint plus hysteresis value
3: setpoint
4: setpoint minus hysteresis
The N/O contact switches if the actual value at I7 reaches the setpoint value.
The N/O contact switches off when the actual value at I7 falls below the
setpoint value minus hysteresis.
A4 GT +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0100 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A4-------ÄQ1
￫The values F1 +0, F2 +0 and OS +0 were not defined. No
values are used with a gain factor, and no offset is used.
on
off
1
2
3
4
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
92 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.4.5.6 Example: Analog value comparator as two-step controller
If, for example, the temperature goes below a value, A1 switches on the
output Q5 with the enable input I1. If the temperature exceeds the set value,
A2 will switch off. If there is no enable signal, output Q1 will always be
switched off by I5.
Parameter settings of both analog value comparators:
A simple circuit can be implemented if a switching point of the controller is
assigned to the digital switching point of the analog input. This switching
point has a 8 V DC (easy-DA, easy-DC) and 9.5 V (easy-AB) signal.
Parameter settings:
I5uA1----SQ1
hA2u---RQ1
I5---k
Switch-on Switch-off
A1 LT +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0500 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
A2 GT +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0550 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0015
I5uA1----SQ1
hI7u---RQ1
I5---k
Switch-on Switch-off
The switch point is
implemented via I7 (digital
switching signal).
A1 LT +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0500 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
4 Wiring with
4.4 Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 93
4.4.5.7 Example: analog value comparator, detection of operating states
Several analog value comparators can be used to evaluate different operating
states. In this case 3 different operating states are evaluated.
Parameter settings of three analog value comparators:
4.4.5.8 Example: analog value comparator, comparison of two analog values
To compare two analog values, you can use the following circuit. In this case,
the comparison determines whether I7 is less than I8.
Parameter settings of the analog value comparator
A6-------ÄN1
A7-------ÄN2
A8-------ÄN3
First operating state
Second operating state Third operating state
A6 EQ +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0500 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A7 EQ +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0700 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A8 EQ +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0850 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
A1-------ÄM9
A1 LT +
I1 I7 Æ
F1 +0
I2 I8 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0025
4 Wiring with
4.5 Counter
94 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.5 Counter
easy provides 16 up/down counters C1 to C16 for use as required. The counter
relays allow you to count events. You can define an upper threshold value as a
comparison value. The contact will switch according to the actual value.
4.5.0.1 High-speed counters, frequency counters up to 1 kHz counter frequency.
easy-DA and easy-DC feature four high-speed counters C13 to C16. The
function is defined by the mode selected. The counter input is connected
directly to a digital input. The high-speed digital inputs are I1 to I4. Possible
applications include the counting of components, lengths, events and
frequency measurement.
Table 13: Counter modes
Counters C1…C16 (Counter)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
C"1“, when actual value ≧
setpoint value
CC Counter
input
- -
DC Count
direction
RC Reset
Ssetpoint value
00000 - 32000
￫The counters of easy500 and easy700 function in the same way
as the counters of easy400 and easy600. If required, the same
counters can be used retentively.
Counter Operating
Mode
C1 to C12 NUp/Down Counter
C13, C14 N or H Up/down counters or high-speed up counters (easy-DA, easy-DC)
C15, C16 N or F Up/down counters or frequency counters (easy-DA, easy-DC)
4 Wiring with
4.5 Counter
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 95
4.5.0.2 Wiring of a counter
You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil. The
counter relay has different coils.
easy circuit diagram with counter relay
The coils and contacts have the following meanings:
4.5.0.3 Parameter display and parameter set for counter relays:
In the parameter display of a counter relay you change the mode, the
setpoint and the enable of the parameter display.
4.5.0.4 Compatibility between the easy400 and easy500, easy600 and easy700: counter parameter
displays
New functions have been added to the parameter display of easy500 and
easy700. The easy400 and easy600 parameters can be found at the
following points.
￫Avoid unforeseeable switch states. Only use each coil of a relay
once in the circuit diagram.
Do not use the input of a high-speed counter as a contact in the
circuit diagram. If the counter frequency is too high only a
random input value will be used in the circuit diagram.
I5-------CC2
I6-------DC2
I7-------RC2
C2-------SM9
Contact Coil
C1 to C16 The contact switches if the actual value is greater than or equal to the setpoint.
CC1 to CC16 Counter input, rising edge counts
DC1 to DC16 Count direction
• Coil not triggered: up counting.
• Coil triggered: down counting.
RC1 to RC16 Reset, coil triggered: actual value reset to 00000
C2 N +
S 00000
C2 Counter function relay number 2
N• Mode N: up/down counter
• Mode H: high-speed up/down counter
• Mode F: frequency counter
+•+ appears in the PARAMETER menu.
•- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
SSetpoint, constant from 00000 to 32000
easy400/600-
Parameters
easy500/700-
Parameters
AAAA =S AAAAA
=
C1 =C1
+=+
fAAAAg
Ä sDIR n
Ä sCNT d C1
Ä yRES b +
C1 N +
S AAAAA
4 Wiring with
4.5 Counter
96 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.5.0.5 Value range
The counter relay counts between 0 and 32000.
4.5.0.6 Behavior when value range is reached
The easy control relay is in RUN mode.
If the value of 32000 is reached, this value will be retained until the count
direction is changed. If the value of 00000 is reached, this value will be
retained until the count direction is changed.
Parameter display in RUN mode:
4.5.0.7 Retention
Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values. You can select
the retentive counter relays in the SYSTEM… → RETENTION… menu. C5 to
C7, C8 and C13 to C16 can be selected.
If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value is retained when the operating
mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the supply voltage is
switched off.
When easy is restarted in RUN mode, the counter relay continues with the
retentively stored actual value.
4.5.0.8 Determining Counter Frequency
The maximum counter frequency depends on the length of the circuit
diagram in easy. The number of contacts, coils and rungs used determines
the run time (cycle time) required to process the easy circuit diagram.
Example: When using EASY512-DC-TC with only three rungs for counting,
resetting and outputting the result via the output, the counter frequency may
be 100 Hz.
The maximum counter frequency depends on the maximum cycle time.
The following formula is used to determine the maximum counter frequency:
fc= maximum counter frequency
tc= maximum cycle time
0.8 = Correction factor
Current setpoint, constant (0309)
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
Actual value (00042)
C1 N +
S 00309
# C:00042
fc=1x 0.8
2 x tc
4 Wiring with
4.5 Counter
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 97
Example
The maximum cycle time is tc = 4000 μs (4 ms).
4.5.1 Function of the counter function relay
:
Figure 54: Signal diagram
1: Count pulses at the count coil CC…
2: Count direction, direction coil DC…
3: Reset signal at the reset coil RC…
4: Counter setpoint (the setpoint in the figure = 6)
5: actual value of the counter
6: contact of the counter, C
• Range A: The relay contact of counter C with setpoint value 6 switches when the actual value is 6.
• Range B: If the counting direction is reversed B, the contact is reset when the actual value is 5.
• Range C: Without count pulses the current actual value is retained.
• Range D: The reset coil resets the counter to 0.
4.5.1.1 Example: counters, counting unit quantities, manual counter value reset
The input I6 contains the necessary counter information and controls the
count coil CC1 of counter 1. Q4 is activated if the setpoint is reached. Q4 is
activated if the setpoint is reached. Q4 remains switched on until I7 resets
counter C1 to zero with the RC1 coil.
fc=1x 0.8 = 100 Hz
2 x 4 ms
on
on
1
2
on
3
on
6
BACD
4
012345678
5
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the counter C1
I6-------CC1
C1-------ÄQ4
I7-Q4----RC1
C1 N +
S 00100
4 Wiring with
4.5 Counter
98 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.5.1.2 Example: counting unit quantities, automatic counter value reset
The input I6 contains the necessary counter information and controls the
count coil CC2 of counter 2. M8 will be switched on for one program cycle if
the setpoint is reached. The counter C2 is automatically set to zero by the
Reset coil RC2.
4.5.1.3 Example of a two counter cascade
Another counter is added to the previous example. As the contact of counter
C2 is only set to 1 for one program cycle, the carry of counter C2 is
transferred to counter C3. The counter C3 prevents further counting when its
setpoint is reached.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
counter C2
I6-------CC2
C2------uÄM8
hRC2
C2 N +
S 01000
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
counter C2
Parameter settings of the
counter C3
25000 pulses are counted.
25 x 1000 = 25000
I6-C3----CC2
C2------uÄM8
dRC2
hCC3
C3-------ÄQ2
I8-Q2----RC3
C2 N +
S 01000
C3 N +
S 00025
4 Wiring with
4.5 Counter
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 99
4.5.1.4 Example: up/down counting with a scan for actual value = zero
The input I6 contains the necessary counter information and controls the
count coil CC6 of counter 6. Marker N2 is set if the setpoint is reached.
Marker N2 controls the direction coil DC6 of counter C6. If N2 is 1 (activated),
counter C6 counts down. If the actual value of the counter is 00000, the
analog value comparator A6 resets mark N2. The direction coil DC6 of
counter C6 is switched off. Counter C6 only operates as an up counter.
4.5.1.5 Example: counter with retentive actual value
Select a retentive counter if you wish to retain the actual value of a counter,
even after a power failure or a change from RUN to STOP.
▶Select the required counter in the SYSTEM... →RETENTION… menu.
The example shows the counters C5 to C7 as retentive counters.
The counter has the value 450 before the power supply is switched off.
Figure 55: Retentive counter
aThe numerical value 450 is retained even after a power outage.
U = supply voltage of the device
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the counter C6
Parameter settings of the analog value comparator A6
￫The above example scans the value zero. However, any
permissible value within the range of the analog value
comparator function block can be entered.
I6-------CC6
C6-------SN2
N2-------DC6
A6-N2----RN2
C6 N +
S 01000
A6 EQ +
I1 C6 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0000 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
M 9 - M12 Æ
M13 - M16
N 9 - N16
C 5 - C 7 åæ
C 8
C13 - C16
T 7
T 8
T13 - T16
D 1 - D 8
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the counter C5
I6-------CC5
C5-------ÄQ3
I8-Q3----RC5
C5 N +
S 00565
U
햲햲
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
100 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
easy provides various high-speed counter functions. These counter function
blocks are coupled directly to digital inputs. The following functions are
possible:
•Frequency counters: C15 and C16
•High-speed counters: C13 and C14.
4.6.1 Frequency Counter
easy provides two frequency counters C15 and C16 for use as required. The
frequency counters can be used for measuring frequencies. The high-speed
frequency counters are permanently connected to the digital inputs I3 and I4.
Applications such as speed monitoring, volume measurement using a
volume counter, the monitoring of machine running can be implemented
with the frequency counter.
The frequency counter allows you to enter an upper threshold value as a
comparison value. The C15 and C16 frequency counters are not dependent
on the cycle time.
4.6.1.1 Counter frequency and pulse shape
The maximum counter frequency is 1 kHz.
The minimum counter frequency is 4 Hz.
The signals must be square waves. We recommend a mark-to-space ratio of
1:1.
If this is not the case:
The minimum mark-to-space ratio is 0.5 ms.
tmin = minimum time of the pulse or pause duration
fmax = maximum count frequency (1 kHz)
4.6.1.2 Measuring procedure
The pulses on the input are counted for one second irrespective of the cycle
time, and the frequency is determined. The measurement result is provided
as an actual value.
tmin = 0.5 x 1
fmax
￫The frequency counters operate independently of the program
cycle time. The result of the actual value setpoint comparison is
only transferred once every program cycle for processing in the
circuit diagram.
The reaction time in relation to the setpoint/actual value
comparison can therefore be up to one cycle in length.
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 101
4.6.1.3 Wiring of a frequency counter
The following assignment of the digital inputs apply.
•I3 counter input for frequency counter C15.
•I4 counter input for frequency counter C16.
You only integrate a frequency counter into your circuit in the form of a
contact and enable coil. The coils and contacts have the following meanings:
4.6.1.4 Parameter display and parameter set for frequency counter:
In the parameter display of a counter relay you change the mode, the
setpoint and the enable of the parameter display.
￫If you use C15 or C16 as frequency counters, coils DC15 or
DC16 will have no function. The counter signals are transferred
directly from the digital inputs I3 and I4 to the counters. A
frequency counter measures the actual value and does not
measure a direction.
----------CC15
C15-------SQ3
I8--------RC15
Contact Coil
C15 - C16 The contact switches if the actual value is greater than or equal to the
setpoint.
CC15, CC16 Enable of the frequency counter on “1” state, coil activated
RC15, RC16 Reset, coil triggered: actual value reset to 00000
￫The frequency counter can also be enabled specifically for a
special operating state. This has the advantage that the cycle
time of the device is only burdened with the frequency
measurement when it is taking place. If the frequency counter
is not enabled, the cycle time of the device is shorter.
C15 F +
S 00246
C15 Counter function relay number 15
FMode F: frequency counter
+•+ appears in the PARAMETER menu.
•- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
SSetpoint, constant from 00000 to 01000
(32000 is a possible setting, the maximum frequency is 1 kHz)
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
102 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.6.1.5 Value range
The counter relay counts between 4 and 1000 [Hz].
Parameter display in RUN mode:
4.6.1.6 Retention
Setting retention on the frequency counter serves no purpose since the
frequency is continuously remeasured.
4.6.1.7 Function of the frequency counter
Figure 56: Signal diagram of frequency counter
1: counter input I3 or I4
2: upper setpoint
3: enable coil CC…
4: reset coil RC…
5: contact (N/O contact) C… upper setpoint value reached.
tg: gate time for the frequency measurement
• Range A: the counter is enabled. After a frequency above the setpoint was measured for the first time,
contact C15 (C16) switches.
• Range B: If the actual value falls below the setpoint, the contact is reset. The removal of the enable
signal resets the actual value to zero.
Current setpoint, constant (0246)
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
Actual value (00153)
C15 F +
S 00246
# C:00153
1
2
3
tgtgtgtgtgtgtgtg
4
5
tg
ABCD
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 103
• Range C: the counter is enabled. After a frequency above the setpoint was measured for the first time,
contact C15 (C16) switches.
• Range D: The reset coil resets the actual value to zero.
Example: frequency counter
Frequency counters with different switch points.
The frequency measured at input I3 is to be classified in different value
ranges. The analog value comparator is used as an additional comparison
option.
The counter is enabled via the marker N3. The value 900 or higher is
detected by frequency counter C15 as the upper limit value. This triggers the
coil of marker N4.
If the frequency is higher than 600 Hz, analog value comparator A1 indicates
this and triggers marker N5.
If the frequency is higher than 400 Hz, analog value comparator A2 indicates
this and triggers marker N6.
4.6.2 High-speed counters
You can use the high-speed counters to count high frequency signals reliably.
easy provides two high-speed up/down counters C13 and C14 for use as
required. The high-speed counter inputs are permanently connected to the
digital inputs I1 and I2. This counter relay allows you to count events
independently of the cycle time.
The high-speed counters allow you to enter an upper threshold value as a
comparison value. The C13 and C14 high-speed counters are not dependent
on the cycle time.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
counter C15
Parameter settings of the
analog value comparator A1
Parameter settings of the
analog value comparator A2
N3-------CC15
C15------ÄN4
A1-------ÄN5
A2-------ÄN6
C15 F +
S 00900
A1 GE +
I1 C15 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0600 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
A2 GE +
I1 C15 Æ
F1 +0
I2 0400 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
104 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.6.2.1 Counter frequency and pulse shape
The maximum counter frequency is 1 kHz.
The signals must be square waves. We recommend a mark-to-space ratio of
1:1.
If this is not the case:
The minimum mark-to-space ratio is 0.5 ms.
tmin = minimum time of the pulse or pause duration
fmax = maximum count frequency (1 kHz)
4.6.2.2 Wiring of a high-speed counter
The following assignment of the digital inputs apply.
•I1: high-speed counter input for counter C13.
•I2: high-speed counter input for counter C14.
You integrate a high-speed counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and
coil.
.The coils and contacts have the following meanings:
tmin = 0.5 x 1
fmax
￫High-speed counters operate independently of the program
cycle time. The result of the actual value setpoint comparison is
only transferred once every program cycle for processing in the
circuit diagram.
The reaction time in relation to the setpoint/actual value
comparison can therefore be up to one cycle in length.
￫If you use C13 or C14 as high-speed counters you must enable
them with the coil CC13 or CC14 accordingly.
----------CC13
C13-------SN3
I6--------DC13
I8-C13----RC13
Contact Coil
C13 - C14 The contact switches if the actual value is greater than or equal to the setpoint.
CC13, CC14 Enable of the high-speed counter on 1 signal coil activated
DC13, DC14 Counting direction
• Status 0, not activated, up counting.
• Status 1, activated, down counting.
RC13, RC14 Reset, coil triggered: actual value reset to 00000
￫The high-speed counter can also be enabled specifically for a
special operating state. This has the advantage that the cycle
time of the device is only burdened with the counting when it is
taking place. If the high-speed counter is not enabled, the cycle
time of the device is shorter.
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 105
4.6.2.3 Parameter display and parameter set for the high-speed counter:
In the parameter display of a counter relay you change the mode, the
setpoint and the enable of the parameter display.
4.6.2.4 Value range
The counter relay counts between 0 and 32000.
4.6.2.5 Behavior when value range is reached
The easy control relay is in RUN mode.
The value is retained if the counter reaches 32000. If the counter counts
down and reaches 0, this value is retained.
Parameter display in RUN mode:
4.6.2.6 Retention
The high-speed counter can be run with the retentive actual value. You can
select the retentive counter relays in the SYSTEM… → RETENTION… menu.
C5 to C7, C8 and C13 to C16 can be selected.
If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value is retained when the operating
mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the supply voltage is
switched off.
When easy is restarted in RUN mode, the counter relay continues with the
retentively stored actual value.
C13 H +
S 00950
C13 Counter function relay number 13
HH high-speed counter mode (H = high speed)
+•+ appears in the PARAMETER menu.
•- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
SSetpoint, constant from 00000 to 32000
Current setpoint, constant (1 250)
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
Actual value (877)
C13 H +
S 00950
# C:00877
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
106 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.6.2.7 Function of the high-speed counter function block
Figure 57: Signal diagram of high-speed counter
1: count pulses at counter input I1(I2)
2: setpoint of the counter
3: actual value of the counter
4: enable of the counter, CC13 (CC14)
5: count direction, direction coil DC13 (DC14)
6: reset coil of the counter RC13 (RC14)
7: contact of the counter, C13 (C14)
• Range A: The relay contact C13 (C14) of the counter with setpoint value "512" switches as soon as the
actual value is "512".
• Range B: When new count pulses or the counter enable are not present, the actual value is retained.
• Range C: If the count direction is reversed DC13 (DC14), the contact is reset when the actual value is
511.
• Range D: the count direction is set to up counting.
• Range E: The Reset coil RC13 (RC14) resets the counter to "0". No pulses are counted.
• Range F: the Reset coil is not active, pulses are counted.
￫In the examples it must be remembered that there may be a
time difference of up to one program cycle between the
setpoint/actual value comparison and the processing of the
result. This may cause deviations in values.
1
2
......... .........
3
4
5
ABC DE
.........
012
3
4
F
6
7
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 107
Example: counting measuring pulses and setting an output
Measuring pulses can represent lengths, rotations, angles or other values.
These program sections are required for applications involving the filling of
sacks, bags or the cutting of foil.
The count signals are continuously present at I1. The high-speed counter C13
counts these pulses. The counter is automatically set to zero if the actual
value equals the setpoint. Contact C13 is then set for one program cycle. The
output Q3 is set at the same time. This is then reset by input I8.
Example: running motors or spindles in parallel.
Applications may involve motion control with the parallel control of two
drives. Only certain deviations are permissible so that the mechanical system
does not jam.
These tasks can be implemented with the following solution.
I8 starts the drives. I7 and I6 carry the feedback signals of the motor
protective circuit breakers. The drives are stopped if a motor protective
circuit breaker trips. The analog value comparators control the difference of
the path distance. The appropriate drive is stopped temporarily if one path
distance is outside of the set tolerance. The following applies:
•M8 = enable for all drives.
•Q1 = drive 1, counter drive 1 is connected with input I1 and this with
high-speed counter C13.
•Q2 = drive 2, counter drive 2 is connected with input I2 and this with
high-speed counter C14.
•A1 = comparison, if C13 is less than C14, drive 2 is too fast.
•A1 = comparison, if C13 is less than C14, drive 2 is too fast.
•A3 = comparison, if C13 and C14 are equal, both drives can be activated.
•The hysteresis value of A1, A2 and A3 depends on the resolution of the
transducer and the mechanical system.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
counter C13
N1------CC13
C13-----SQ13
C13 -----RC13
I8------RQ13
C
13
H+
S 1000
4 Wiring with
4.6 High-speed counters, -DA, -DC
108 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the counter C13
Parameter settings of the counter C14
Parameter setting of analog value comparators A1 and A2
Parameter settings A3
I8-I7-I6-ÄM8
M8uA2u---ÄQ1
dA3k
dA1u---ÄQ2
hA3k
-------uCC13
hCC14
C13 H +
S +0
C14 H +
S +0
A1 LT +
I1 C13 Æ
F1 +0
I2 C14 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0015
A2 LT +
I1 C14 Æ
F1 +0
I2 C13 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0015
A1 EQ +
I1 C13 Æ
F1 +0
I2 C14 æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY 0020
4 Wiring with
4.7 Text Display
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 109
4.7 Text Display
easy500 and easy700 can display up to 16 user-defined texts. These texts
can be triggered by the actual values of function relays such as timing relays,
counters, operating hours counters, analog value comparators, date, time or
scaled analog values. Set values of timer relays, counters, hours run counters
and analog value comparators can be altered during the display of the texts.
The texts are saved in the easySoft file or on the EASY-M-32K memory card
for easy500 and easy700.
4.7.1 Wiring a text display
You integrate a text display into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil.
The coils and contacts have the following meanings:
The text display does not have a parameter display in the PARAMETER
menu.
4.7.2 Retention
The texts D1 to D8 can be operated with retentive actual values (contacts).
Text display D1...D16 (Display)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
D.. State of the coil
D.. 1 shows the
text in the
display
OP1 Actual value for line 2 - -
- - - - OP2 Actual value for line 3 - -
￫The text display can only be edited with the easySoft-Basic or
easySoft-Pro from Version 6.xx.
￫Compatibility with easy600
If you wish to load an existing easy600 circuit diagram, the
available text display functions are retained. The text display in
easy500 and easy700 devices operates in the same way as in
an easy600 device.
I5-------ÄD2
I6-------ÄD3
D2u------ÄT5
D3k
Contact Coil
D1 -D16 Coil of the corresponding text display is triggered
Ä, Å, è, ^, ä, S, R
D1 -D16
If a coil is triggered, the text is shown in the display.
4 Wiring with
4.7 Text Display
110 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
If the text displays are retentive, the actual value is retained when the
operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power
supply is switched off.
When easy is restarted in RUN mode, the text displays D1 to D8 continue
with the retentively stored actual value.
Example of a text display:
The text display has the following display characteristics:
4.7.3 Scaling
The values of the analog inputs can be scaled.
4.7.4 Function
The D (D = “Display”) text display function relay works in the circuit diagram
like a normal M marker. A “1” signal at the coil will cause a stored text to be
displayed in the easy display line. For this to take place, the easy must be in
RUN mode and the Status display must be activated before the text is
displayed.
The following rule applies to D2 to D16:
•If several texts are present and are triggered, each text is displayed
automatically in turn every 4 s. This process will be repeated until:
•No other text display function block is set to 1.
•STOP operating mode is selected.
•easy's power supply is no longer present.
•A menu was selected via OK or DEL + ALT.
•A setpoint value is entered.
•The text for D1 is displayed.
The following function applies to D1:
•D1 is designed for alarm text. If a text has been assigned to D1 and it is
activated, this text is shown permanently in the display until:
•The coil D1 is reset to 0.
SWITCHING;
CONTROL;
DISPLAY;
ALL EASY!
Line 1, 12 characters
Line 2, 12 characters, a setpoint or actual value
Line 3, 12 characters, one actual value or set value
Line 4, 12 characters
RUNTIME M:S
T1 :012:46
C1 :0355 ST
PRODUCED
Area Selectable display
range
Example
0 - 10 V 0 - 9999 0000 - 0100
0 - 10 V ± 999 –025 - 050
0 - 10 V ± 9.9 –5.0 - 5.0
4 Wiring with
4.7 Text Display
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 111
•STOP operating mode is selected.
•easy's power supply is no longer present.
•The OK or DEL + ALT buttons are used to switch to a menu.
4.7.5 Text Entry
The text entry can only be carried out with easySoft-Basic or easySoft-Pro
from Version 6.xx).
4.7.6 Font
The ASCII letters can be displayed in upper and lower case.
•A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
•a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
•0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
You can edit Cyrillic upper case letters with easy500/700 devices from
version no. 10.
From easySoft version 6.x, the following special characters are permitted in
addition to the blank character and 12 different graphic characters:
° ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Figure 58: Text output examples
4.7.7 Entering a setpoint in a display
Two values from the following sources can be included in a text:
•actual value and setpoint of function relays,
•analog input values,
•Time and
•Date.
The position of the setpoints and actual values is defined in the middle of the
2nd and 3rd line starting from column 5. The length depends on the value to
be displayed. Setpoint entries in text displays are useful if the PARAMETERS
menu is not available for the display or entry. They are also used if the
operator is to receive a message as to which setpoint he is to change.
Counter with actual value Analog input scaled as
temperature value
D1 as error message on
fuse failure
QUANTITY
PCE:0042
!COUNTING!
TEMPERATURE
OUT -010 DEG
IN +018 DEG
HEAT..
FUSE FAULT
HOUSE 1
FAILED!
4 Wiring with
4.7 Text Display
112 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
The example shows the following.
The setpoint of timing relay T1 is to be changed from 12 minutes to 15
minutes.
•Line 2: setpoint of timing relay T1, can be edited.
•Line 3: actual value of timing relay T1.
The text is displayed.
▶Pressing the ALT button will cause the cursor to jump to the first editable
value.
In this Selection mode you can use the cursor buttons ÍÚ to jump from one
editable constant to another.
▶Press the OK button, the cursor will jump to the highest digit of the
constant to be modified.
In this Entry mode, you use the ÍÚ cursor buttons to change the value. The
cursor buttons úí are used to move from digit to digit inside the constant.
Use the OK button to accept the modified value. Use the ESC button to
abort the entry and leave the previous value.
▶Pressing the OK button causes the cursor to return to Selection mode.
The modified value is accepted.
Press the ESC button to leave Entry mode.
Line 1
Line 2, setpoint can be edited
Line 3, setpoint can be edited
Line 4
￫The appropriate text function block in the display must be
available in order to modify a setpoint.
The setpoint must be a constant.
￫During value entry, the text is retained statically on the display.
Any actual values are refreshed.
RUNTIME M:S
T1 :012:46
C1 :0355 ST
PRODUCED
STIR M:S
S : 012:00
ACT:008:33
BREAD ROLLS
STIR M:S
S : 012:00
ACT:008:33
BREAD ROLLS
STIR M:S
S: 012:00
ACT:008:33
BREAD ROLLS
STIR M:S
S : 015:00
ACT:008:34
BREAD ROLLS
STIR M:S
S : 015:00
ACT:008:34
BREAD ROLLS
STIR M:S
S : 015:00
ACT:008:34
BREAD ROLLS
4 Wiring with
4.8 Weekly timer
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 113
4.8 Weekly timer
easy500 and easy700 with type suffix EASY…-…-.C. are provided with a real-
time clock. The time switches can only be used properly in these devices.
easy offers eight weekly timers Ö1 to Ö8 for up to 32 switch times.
Each time switch has four channels which you can use to set four on and off
times. The channels are set via the parameter display.
The timer has a back-up battery. This means that it will continue to run in the
event of a power failure, although the time switch relays will not switch. The
contacts are kept open when de-energized. Information on the battery back-
up time are provided on (￫Chapter 8 "Appendix“, page 211).
A weekly timer can be integrated into your circuit in the form of a contact.
￫The procedure for setting the time, (￫section “5.4 Setting
date and time”, page 170).
Weekly timer Ö1…Ö8 (Week)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
Ö1 if on time is reached - - - - - -
￫Compatibility with easy400 and easy600
If you wish to load an existing easy400 or easy600 circuit
diagram, the existing weekly timer functions are retained. The
weekly timer in easy500 devices and easy700 devices operates
in the same way as in an easy400 device, easy600.
Ö1u------ÄQ1
Ö2k
Contact Coil
Ö1 - Ö8 Contact of the weekly timer
4 Wiring with
4.8 Weekly timer
114 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.8.1 Parameter display and parameter set for weekly timer:
The parameter display for a weekly timer is used to modify the weekdays,
the closing delay, the break time and enable of the parameter display.
4.8.1.1 Compatibility between easy400 and easy500, easy600 and easy700: parameter display
weekly timer
The parameter display for easy500 and easy700 has been changed. The
easy400 and easy600 parameters can be found at the following points.
Table 14: On and off times
Parameter display in RUN mode:
Ö1 A +
D SO
ON --:--
OFF --:--
Ö1weekly timer function relay 1
A,B,
C,D
Time switch channels
+•+ appears in the PARAMETER menu,
•- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
DDay setting, from -- to --
ON Closing delay
OFF Off time
easy400, easy600
parameters
easy500, easy700
parameters
Ö1 =Ö1
AA-BB =AA-BB
A =A
ON --:-- =ON --:--
OFF --:-- =OFF --:--
+ =+
Parameters Meaning Meaningful values
Weekdays Monday to Sunday MO, TU, WE, TH, FR, SA, SU, --
Closing delay Hours: Minutes
No time set at “--:--”
00:00 to 23:59, --:--
Off time Hours: Minutes
No time set at “--:--”
00:00 to 23:59, --:--
Selected channel, current time (only in RUN)
Weekday(s) from - to
Closing delay
Off time
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
fAA-BBg
n dÖ1
ON s--:--n A
OFFy--:--b +
Ö1 A +
D AA-BB
ON --:--
OFF --:--
Ö1 A 11:30 +
D MO-FR
ON 06:45
OFF 19:30 â
4 Wiring with
4.8 Weekly timer
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 115
4.8.2 Changing time switch channel
You can change time switch channel in either RUN or STOP mode by
selecting the channel required with the cursor buttons ÍÚ
Example:
The parameter display of the weekly timer is active. The cursor is flashing on
channel A.
▶Press the Í button to move the cursor to channel B.
Press the í button to reach any value that can be edited.
4.8.3 Function of the weekly timer (example parameter setting)
The following examples illustrate the function of the weekly timer.
4.8.3.1 Work days example
The time switch Ö1 switches on Monday to Friday between 6:30 and 9:00
and between 17:00 and 22:30.
Figure 59: Work days signal diagram
Ö1 A 11:30 +
D MO-FR
ON 06:45
OFF 19:30 â
Ö1 B 11:30 +
D SA
ON 06:45
OFF 15:00 â
Ö1 A +
D MO-FR
ON 06:30
OFF 09:00
Ö1 B +
D MO-FR
ON 17:00
OFF 22:30
on
on
on
A
B
MO DI MI DO FR SA SO
4 Wiring with
4.8 Weekly timer
116 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.8.3.2 Weekends example
Time switch Ö2 switches on at 16:00 on Friday and switches off at 6:00 on
Monday.
Figure 60: Signal diagram of “weekend”
4.8.3.3 Night switching example
Time switch Ö3 switches on at 22:00 on Monday and switches off at 6:00 on
Tuesday.
Figure 61: Night switching signal diagram
Ö2 A +
D FR
ON 16:00
OFF --:--
Ö2 B+
D MO
ON --:--
OFF 06:00
on
on
on
A
B
FR SA SO MO
￫If the break time is before the closing delay, easy will switch off
on the following day.
Ö3 D+
D MO
ON 22:00
OFF 06:00
on
on
D
MO DI
4 Wiring with
4.8 Weekly timer
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 117
4.8.3.4 Time overlaps example
The time settings of a time switch overlap. The clock switches on at 16:00
on Monday, whereas on Tuesday and Wednesday it switches on at 10:00.
On Monday to Wednesday the switching-off time is 22:00.
Figure 62: Time overlaps signal diagram
4.8.3.5 Power failure example
The power is removed between 15:00 and 17:00. The relay drops out and
remains off, even after retriggering of the power supply, since the first break
time was at 16:00.
4.8.3.6 24 hour switching example
The time switch is to switch for 24 hours. Switch-on time at 00:00 on
Monday and switch-off time at 00:00 on Tuesday.
￫On and off times always follow the channel which switches
first.
Ö4 A +
D MO-MI
ON 16:00
OFF 22:00
Ö4 B+
D TU-WE
ON 10:00
OFF 00:00
￫When it is switched on, easy always updates the switching
state on the basis of all the available switching time settings.
Ö4 A +
D MO-SU
ON 12:00
OFF 16:00
Ö4 B+
D MO-SU
ON 12:00
OFF 18:00
Ö1 A +
D MO
ON 00:00
OFF --:--
Ö1 B+
D TU
ON --:--
OFF 00:00
4 Wiring with
4.9 Operating Hours Counter
118 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.9 Operating Hours Counter
easy provides 4 independent operating hours counters. These operating
hours counters enables you to record the operating hours of systems,
machines and machine parts. An adjustable setpoint can be selected within
the value range. In this way, maintenance times can be logged and reported.
The counter states are retained even when the device is switched off. As
long as the count coil of the operating hours counter is active, easy counts
the hours in second cycles.
You integrate an operating hours counter into your circuit in the form of a
contact and coil.
Parameter display and parameter set for the operating hours counter function
block:
In the parameter display of an operating hours counter you change the
setpoint in hours and the enable of the parameter display.
Hours-run counter O1…O4 (Operating Time)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
O. "1“, when actual value ≧
setpoint value ?.
.Count coil
R.. Reset coil
SSetpoint value [h]
OActual
value
[h]
I2-------ÄO1
O1uI8----RO1
h------TT1
T1-------ÄQ3
Contact Coil
O1 - O4
ÄO1 - ÄO4 Count coil of the operating hours counter
RO1 - RO4 Reset coil of the operating hours counter
O4 +
S 000000
O:
O4 Operating hours counter number 4
+•+ appears in the parameter display
•- appears in the parameter display
SSetpoint in hours
O: Actual value of the operating hours counter [h]
4 Wiring with
4.9 Operating Hours Counter
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 119
Parameter display in RUN mode:
4.9.1 Value range of the operating hours counter
The operating hours counter counts in the range from 0 hours to way over
100 years.
4.9.2 Accuracy of the operating hours counter
The operating hours counter counts in seconds. When the device is switched
off, up to 999 ms can be lost.
4.9.3 Function of the operating hours counter function relay
When the coil of the O operating hours counter is set to 1, the counter
increments its actual value by 1 (basic pulse: 1 second).
If the actual value of the hours-run counter reaches the setpoint value of S,
the contact O… switches for as long as the actual value is greater than or
equal to the setpoint value.
The actual value is kept stored in the device until the Reset coil RO… is
triggered. The actual value is then set to zero.
Set time in hours
Actual time in hours
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
O1 +
S 001000
#O:000309
￫Operating mode change RUN, STOP, power On, Off, Delete
program, Change program, Load new program. All these
functions do not clear the actual value of the operating hours
counter.
4 Wiring with
4.9 Operating Hours Counter
120 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.9.3.1 Example: operating hours counter
Operating hours counter for the operating time of a machine. The time in
which a machine (easy) is energized is to be measured.
4.9.3.2 Example maintenance meter for different machine sections
Machine sections have to be maintained after different times have elapsed.
Markers N1 and N2 are the On markers of two different machine sections.
These markers control the associated operating hours counters. Output Q4
switches on a warning light if the setpoint of an operating hours counter has
been reached. A keyswitch at input I8 resets the associated operating hours
counter after maintenance has been completed.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of
operating hours counter O1
---------ÄO1
O1 +
S 000000
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of operating hours counter O2
Parameter settings of operating hours counter O3
N1-------ÄO2
N2-------ÄO3
O2u------ÄQ4
O3k
I8uO2----RO2
hO3----RO3
O2 +
S 000500
O3 +
S 000800
4 Wiring with
4.9 Operating Hours Counter
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 121
4.9.3.3 Example maintenance meter for different machine sections, with text output
The entire machine operating time is to be counted. Machine areas have to
be maintained after different times have elapsed. Markers N1 and N2 are the
On markers of two different machine areas. These markers control the
associated operating hours counters. Output Q4 switches on a warning light
if the setpoint of an operating hours counter has been reached. This should
flash. A keyswitch at input I8 resets the associated operating hours counter
after maintenance has been completed.
The entire machine operation time is to be displayed continuously. The run
time of the machine sections should only be displayed once the maintenance
interval has elapsed.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of operating hours counter O1
Parameter settings of
operating hours counter O2
Parameter settings of operating hours counter O3
Parameter setting of timing
relay T1
Text of text display D2
Text of text display D3 Text of text display D4
---------ÄO1
O1-------ÄD4
N1-------ÄO2
N2-------ÄO3
O2u------TT4
O3k
T4-------ÄQ4
O2uI8----RO2
h------ÄD2
O3uI8----RO3
h------ÄD3
O1 +
S 000000
O2 +
S 000500
O3 +
S 000800
T1 ÜS+
I1 02,000
I2 01,500
T:
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
HRS:000501
MACHINE 01
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
HRS:000800
MACHINE 02
RUNTIME
MACHINE
HRS:001955
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
122 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.10 Timing Relay
easy provides 16 timing relays T1 to T16 for use as required.
A timing relay is used to change the switch time and the on and off time of a
switch contact. The adjustable delay times are between 2 ms and 99 h 59
min. A time setpoint uses positive values, for example by means of a
constant. You can also use variables as a time setpoint, such as the values of
analog inputs or the actual values of counter relays and timing relays.
You can also use easy as a multi-function relay in the application. easy is
more flexible than any hardwired timing relay since you can wire all the
functions at the push of a button as well as program additional functions.
Counters C1…C16 (Counter)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
T"1" if the on condition is
fulfilled
DD Trigger coil
HT Stop coil
R T Reset Coil
I1 Time setpoint 1
I2 Time setpoint 2
TActual
value
￫The timing relays of easy500 and easy700 function in the same
way as the timing relays of easy400 and easy600 with the
following exceptions:
1. easy500 and easy700:
•The timing relay output starts with a pulse for the flash
function.
•After the Reset coil is activated, the time is set to 0.
When the Reset coil is deactivated, the time count is
started again at 0.
2. easy400 and easy600:
•The timing relay output starts with a pause for the flash
function.
•The time is not counted until the trigger coil is
deactivated and then reactivated.
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 123
You integrate a timing relay into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil.
4.10.1 Parameter display and parameter set for a timing relay:
In the parameter display of a timing relay you can change the mode, the time
base, the time setpoint 1, time setpoint 2 (if necessary) and the enable of the
parameter display.
4.10.1.1 Compatibility between the easy400 and easy500, easy600 and easy700 timing relay
parameter displays
New functions have been added to the parameter display of easy500 and
easy700. The easy400 and easy600 parameters can be found at the
following points.
Parameter display in RUN mode:
I1-I4----TT1
T1-------ÄQ3
Contact Coil
T1 -T16 Contact of a timing relay
TT1 -TT16 Enable, timing relay trigger
RT1 -RT16 Reset coil of the timing relay
HT1 - HT16 Stop coil of the timing relay (H = Stop , S means the Set coil function)
￫Avoid unforeseeable switch states. Only use each coil of a relay
once in the circuit diagram.
T1 X S +
I1 00.00
I2 00.00
T:
T1 Timing relay number 1
XOn-time mode
STime range in seconds
+•+ appears in the PARAMETER menu.
•- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
I1 Time setpoint 1:
• Positive value via constant or variable from I7, I8, I11, I12 (analog inputs).
• Variable via actual value T1 to T16, C1 to C16.
I2 Time setpoint 2 (with timing relay with 2 setpoints):
• Positive value via constant or variable from I7, I8, I11, I12 (analog inputs).
• Variable via actual value T1 to T16, C1 to C16.
T: Display of actual value in RUN mode
easy400/600-
Parameters
easy500/700-
Parameters
T1 =T1
X =X
S =S
AA.BB =AA.BB
+ =+
X w g
SnAA.BBn
Ä sTRG dT1
yRES b+
T1 X S +
I1 AA.BB
I2
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
124 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.10.2 Retention
Timing relays can be run with retentive actual values. Select the number of
retentive timing relays in the SYSTEM… → RETENTION… menu.T7, T8, T13
to T16 can be used as retentive timing relays.
If a timing relay is retentive, the actual value is retained when the operating
mode is changed from RUN to STOP and when the power supply is switched
off.
When easy is restarted in RUN mode, the timing relay continues with the
retentively stored actual value.
4.10.3 Timing relay modes
Mode, time base
Time setpoint 1
Time setpoint 2
Actual value of elapsed time
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
T1 X S +
I1 10,000
I2 00.00
#T:03.305
￫When easy is restarted, the status of the trigger pulse must be
the same as on disconnection.
Status 1 with all operating modes:
•On delayed,
•Single pulse,
•Flashing.
Status 0 with all operating modes: off-delayed.
Status 1 or 0 (as with disconnection): on-delayed: on/off-delayed
Parameters Switch function
XOn-delayed switching
?X On-delayed switching with random time range
âOff-delayed switching
?âOff-delayed switching with random time range
XâOn- and off-delayed, two time setpoints
?XâOn- and off-delayed switching with random time, 2 time setpoints
üSingle pulse switching
ÜFlash switching, mark-to-space ratio = 1:1, 2 time setpoints
ÜFlash switching, mark-to-space ratio = 1:1, 2 time setpoints
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 125
4.10.4 Time Range
Variable values as time setpoint (analog inputs I7, I8, I11, I12, actual value T1
to T16, C1 to C16).
4.10.4.1 Variable time setpoints
When using variable values, such as the actual value of a different timing
relay, easy will only accept its output value with the conversion. The time
range selected for this timing relay is ignored.
The following conversion rules apply:
For "s" time base
With the time base “s” the value is accepted as a “value in ms”. The last
position is rounded up to a zero or five.
Equation: Time setpoint = ( Value x 10) in [ms]
Parameters Time range and setpoint time Resolution
S 00.000 Seconds: 0.00 to 99,990 s 10 ms
M:S 00:00 Minutes: Seconds 00:00 to 99:59 1s
H:M 00:00 Hours: Minutes, 00:00 to 99:59 1min.
￫Minimum time setting:
If a time value is less than the logic relay's cycle time, the
elapsed time will not be recognized until the next cycle. This
may cause unforeseeable switching states.
￫If the value of the variable is greater than the maximum
permissible value of the configured time range, the maximum
value of the time range will be used as the setpoint.
￫If you are using analog values as time setpoints, ensure that the
value of the analog input is stable. Oscillating analog values
deteriorate the reproducibility of the time value.
Value, e.g. Analog input Time setpoint in [s]
000.00
100 01.00
300 03.00
500 05.00
1023 10.23
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
126 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
For "M:S" time base
With the time base “M:S” the value is accepted as a “value in s”.
Rule:
Time setpoint = Value divided by 60 Integer result = Number of hours,
remainder is the number of minutes
For time base H:M
With the time base “H:M:” the value is accepted as a “value in M
(minutes)”.
Rule:
Time setpoint = Value divided by 60, integer result = Number of hours,
remainder is the number of minutes
Value, e.g. Analog input Time setpoint in [M:S]
000:00
100 01:40
300 05:00
500 08:20
1023 17:03
Value, e.g. Analog input Time setpoint in [H:M]
000:00
100 01:40
300 05:00
606 10:06
1023 17:03
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 127
4.10.5 Function of the timing relay function relay
4.10.5.1 Timing relay, on delayed with and without random switching
Time value I1: on-delay time
Random switching: The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within
the setpoint value range.
Figure 63: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed
(with and without random switching)
1: trigger coil TTx
2: Stop coil HTx
3: Reset coil RTx
4: Switch contact (make) Tx
ts: Setpoint time
• Range A: The set time elapses normally.
• Range B: The entered setpoint does not elapse normally because the trigger coil drops out prematurely.
• Range C: The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing.
Figure 64: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed
(with and without random switching)
• Range D: The Stop coil is inoperative after the time has elapsed.
• Range E: The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact.
• Range F: After the reset coil is activated, the switching contact is switched off and the internal time
counter is reset. The function relay waits for a new trigger pulse.
Retriggering during response delay
If the trigger coil drops out while the on-delay time is running down, the
timing relay stops the on-delay time and resets the actual value t to 0. After
the trigger coil is set again, the entire on-delay time is run down.
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s
t
AB
t
s
1
2
4
3
C
tF
DE
ts
1
2
4
3
ts
F
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
128 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.10.5.2 Timing relay, off delayed with and without random switching
Time value I1: Off-delay time
Random switching: The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within
the setpoint value range.
Figure 65: Signal diagram of timing relay, off-delayed
(with and without random switching)
1: trigger coil TTx
2: Stop coil HTx
3: Reset coil RTx
4: Switch contact (N/O) Tx
ts: setpoint time
• Range A: The time elapses after the trigger coil is deactivated.
• Range B: The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing.
• Range C: The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact. After the Reset coil drops out, the relay
continues to work normally.
• Range D: The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact when the function block is timing out.
Retriggering during the off-delay
If the trigger coil is activated again while the off-delay time is running down,
the timing relay stops the off-delay time and resets the actual value t to 0.
After the trigger coil is reset, the entire off-delay time set is run down.
Figure 66: Signal diagram of timing relay, off-delayed
(with/without random switching with retriggering)
Range E: The trigger coil drops out twice. The actual time t1 is cleared and the set time ts elapses
completely (retriggerable switch function).
AB
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s
t
s
C
1
2
4
3
t
s
D
t
1
2
4
3
ts
E
t
1
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 129
4.10.5.3 Timing relay, on delayed and off delayed with and without random switching
Time value I1: on-delay time
Time value I2: off-delay time
Operating mode with Random switching: The contact of the timing relay
switches randomly within the setpoint value ranges.
Figure 67: Operational diagrams timing relay, on and off delayed 1
1: trigger coil TTx
2: Stop coil HTx
3: Reset coil RTx
4: Switch contact (N/O) Tx
ts1: pick-up time
ts2: drop-out time
• Range A: The relay processes the two times without any interruption.
• Range B: The trigger coil drops out before the on-delay is reached.
• Range C: The stop coil stops the timeout of the on-delay.
• Range D: The stop coil has no effect in this range.
The description of the retriggering during the on-delay is provided on
￫Chapter 4 "Wiring with“, page 127
Figure 68: Operational diagrams timing relay, on and off delayed 2
• Range E: The stop coil stops the timeout of the off-delay.
• Range F: The Reset coil resets the relay after the on delay has elapsed
• Range G: After the reset coil is activated, the internal time counter is reset. The switching contact
remains switched off. The function relay waits for a new trigger pulse.
ABC
1
2
4
3
D
tt
s1
t
s2
t
s2
t
s1
t
s2
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s1
EF
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s2
G
1
2
4
3
t
t
s1
t
s1
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
130 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Figure 69: Operational diagrams timing relay, on and off delayed 3
• Range H: The Reset pulse interrupts the run down of the time and sets the elapsed time to 0.
If the trigger coil is activated again whilst the off-delay time is running down,
the off-delay time is stopped.
Retriggering during the off-delay
In on-delay and off-delay mode, the behavior of the timing relay when it is
retriggered during the off-delay depends on the parameter setting and the
actual value t:
•setpoint value I1 ≧ reference value I2
If the trigger coil is activated again, the actual time t is stopped. The off-delay
time does not run down until the trigger coil drops out.
•Setpoint value I1 < Setpoint value I2
•Actual time t < Setpoint value I1
If the trigger coil is actuated again, the actual time t is stopped. The off-delay
time does not run down until the trigger coil drops out.
•Actual time t ≧ Setpoint value I1
If the trigger coil is actuated again, the actual time t is set to 0. If the trigger
coil subsequently drops out, the set off-delay time is run down again.
This behavior is also the same for on-delay and off-delay modes with random
switching.
H
t
1
2
4
3
t
s1
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 131
4.10.5.4 Timing relay, single pulse
Time value I1: Pulse time
Figure 70: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 1
1: trigger coil TTx
2: Stop coil HTx
3: Reset coil RTx
4: Switch contact (N/O) Tx
• Range A: The trigger signal is short and is lengthened
• Range B: The trigger signal is longer than the set time.
• Range C: The stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time.
Figure 71: Operational diagram timing relay, pulse shaping 2
• Range D: The reset coil resets the timing relay.
• Range E: The reset coil resets the timing relay. The Trigger coil is still activated after the Reset coil has
been deactivated and the time is still running.
A B
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s
t
s
t
s
C
1
2
4
3
t
DE
tt
s
1
2
4
3
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
132 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.10.5.5 Timing relay, flashing
You can set the mark to space ratio to 1:1 or ≠ 1:1.
Time value I1: mark time
Time value I2: space time
Mark-to-space ratio=1:1 flashing: S1 equals S2. Mark-to-space ratio ≠ 1:1
flashing: S1 not equal S2.
Figure 72: Timing relay signal diagram, flashing
1: trigger coil TTx
2: Stop coil HTx
3: Reset coil RTx
4: Switch contact (N/O) Tx
• Range A: The relay flashes for as long as the Trigger coil is activated.
• Range B: The stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time.
• Range C: The reset coil resets the relay.
4.10.6 Examples timing relay
4.10.6.1 Example: timing relay, on-delayed
In this example a conveyor belt starts 10 s after the system is powered up.
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s2
t
s1
t
s1
t
s1
t
s2
t
s2
t
s1
t
s1
t
s2
t
s2
AB
1
2
4
3
tt
s1
t
s2
C
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of timing relay T1
I5-------TT1
T1-------ÄQ1
T1 X S +
I1 10,000
I2
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 133
4.10.6.2 Example: timing relay, off-delayed
The off-delayed function is used to implement a rundown time on the
conveyor if required.
4.10.6.3 Example: timing relay, on- and off-delayed
The on/off-delayed function is used to implement the delay of both the
startup and the disconnection if required.
4.10.6.4 Example: timing relay, single pulse
The input pulses present may vary in length. These pulses must be
normalized to the same length. The Single pulse function can be used very
simply to implement this.
4.10.6.5 Example: timing relay, flashing
This example shows a continuous flash pulse function. Outputs Q3 or Q4
flash according to the marker states of M8 or M9.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of timing relay T2
I6-------TT2
T2-------ÄQ2
T2 â S +
I1 30,000
I2
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of timing relay T3
I6-------TT3
T3-------ÄQ3
T3 Xâ S +
I1 10,000
I2 30,000
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of timing relay T4
I7-------TT4
T4-------ÄQ4
T4 ü S +
I1 10,000
I2
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of timing relay T5
---------DD5
T5uM8----ÄQ3
hM9----ÄQ4
T5 Ü S +
I1 02,000
I2 01,000
4 Wiring with
4.10 Timing Relay
134 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.10.6.6 Example: on-delayed timing relay with retentive actual value
Select a retentive timing relay if you wish to retain the actual value of a
timing relay, even after a power failure or a change from RUN to STOP.
▶Select the required timing relay in the SYSTEM… → RETENTION…
menu.
The example shows the timing relays T7, T8 as retentive timing relays.
Markers M9 to M12 were also selected as retentive.
Figure 73: Function of the circuit
1: power supply
2: status of marker M9 and thus trigger signal T8
3: status of make contact T8
M 9 - M12 åÆ
M13 - M16
N 9 - N16
C 5 - C 7 æ
C 8
C13 - C16
T 7 å
T 8 å
T13 - T16
D 1 - D 8
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of timing
relay T8
M9-------TT8
T8-------ÄQ1
T8 X M:S +
I1 15:00
I2
t
1
+ t
2
= t
s
1
2
3
4 Wiring with
4.11 Jumps
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 135
4.11 Jumps
Jumps can be used to optimize the structure of a circuit diagram or to
implement the function of a selector switch. Jumps can be used for example
to select whether manual/automatic operation or other machine programs
are to be set.
You integrate :1 jumps into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil.
Jumps consist of a jump location and a jump label.
4.11.1 Function
If the jump coil is triggered, the rungs after the jump coil are no longer
processed. The states of the coils before the jump will be retained, unless they
are overwritten in rungs that were not missed by the jump. Jumps are always
made forwards, i.e. the jump ends on the first contact with the same number
as that of the coil.
•Coil = Jump when 1
•Contact only at the first leftmost contact = Jump label
The "Jump label" contact point is always set to “1”.
Jumps :1 to :8
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
x: Jump Destination ÄxJump Location - - - -
I2-------Ä:1
---------Ä:2
:1
T1-------ÄQ3
Contact Coil
:1 to :8
(can only be used as
first leftmost contact)
Ä:1 to Ä:8
￫Backward jumps are not possible with easy due to the way it
operates.
If the jump label does not come after the jump coil, the jump will
be made to the end of the circuit diagram. The last rung will also
be skipped.
Multiple use of the same jump coil and jump contact is possible
as long as this is implemented in pairs, i.e.:
Coil Ä:1/jumped range/Contact:1,Coil Ä:1/jumped range/
Contact :1 etc.
CAUTION
If rungs are skipped, the states of the coils are retained. The
time of started timing relays continues to run.
4 Wiring with
4.11 Jumps
136 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.11.2 Power Flow Display
Jumped sections are indicated by the coils in the power flow display.
All coils after the jump coil are shown with the symbol :: of the jump coil.
4.11.2.1 Example
A selector switch allows two different sequences to be set.
•Sequence 1: Switch on motor 1 immediately.
•Sequence 2: Switch on Guard 2, Wait time, then switch on Motor 1.
Contacts and relays used:
•I1 sequence 1
•I2 sequence 2
•I3 guard 2 moved out
•I12 motor protective circuit breaker switched on
•Q1 motor 1
•Q2 guard 2
•T1 wait time 30.00 s, on-delayed
•D1 text “Motor protective circuit breaker tripped”
Circuit diagram: Power flow display: I1 selected:
Section from jump label 1 processed.
Jump to label 8.
Section to jump label 8 skipped.
Jump label 8, circuit diagram processed from
this point on.
I1-------Ä:1
I2-------Ä:2
:1
--------uÄQ1
hRQ2
---------Ä:8
:2-------ÄQ2
Q2-I3----TT2
T2-------ÄQ1
:8
I12-------
ÄD1
I1-------Ä:1
I2------- :
:1
--------uÄQ1
hRQ2
---------Ä:8
:2------- :
Q2-I3---- :
T2------- :
:8
I12------ÄD1
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 137
4.12 Year Time Switch
easy500 and easy700 with type designation EASY…-..-.C. are fitted with a
real-time clock and thus allow the use of weekly timer and year time switch
function relays.
4.12.1 Function
If you have to implement special on and off switching functions on public
holidays, vacations, company holidays, school holidays and special events,
these can be implemented easily with the year time switch.
easy offers eight year time switches Y1 to Y8 for up to 32 switch times.
For each year time switch four channels A, B, C and D are available.
You can choose an on and off switching time for every channel. These
channels of a year time switch all act jointly on the contact Y that you include
in the circuit diagram. The channels are set via the parameter display or
easySoft.
The year time switch can switch recurrent intervals by switching them on
and off for individual days, months or years. They can also switch
continuous time ranges in which they can be set to stay on at the
beginning of any day to the end of any day, month or year.
Year time switch Y1…Y8 (Year)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
Y1 if on time is reached - - - - - -
￫The procedure for setting the time is described under
￫Section "5.4 Setting date and time“ on page 170.
￫The parameters for the switch-on and switch-off times for
recurring intervals are configured in one single channel for each.
The parameters for the switch-on and switch-off times for a
continuous period of time are configured in two neighbouring
channels (A and B or B and C).
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
138 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.12.2 Behavior in the event of a power failure
The time and date are backed up in the event of a power supply failure and
continue to run. This means that it will continue to run in the event of a
power failure, although the time switch relays will not switch. The contacts
are kept open when de-energized. Refer to ￫Section "8.3 Technical data“,
page 211, for information on the buffer time.
4.12.3 Wiring of a year time switch
You can only include a year time switch in your circuit diagram as a Y..
contact.
The coils and contacts have the following meanings:
4.12.4 Parameter display and parameter set for year time switch
The parameter display for a year time switch is used to modify the closing
delay, the break time and the enable of the parameter display.
Table 15: On and off times
Parameter display in RUN mode:
￫The clock module integrated in easy works within the date
range 2001-01-01 to 2099-12-31
Y1u------ÄQ1
Y2k
Ö1-Y3----ÄQ2
Contact Coil
Y1 to Y8 Contact of the year time switch
Y1 A +
ON --.--.--
OFF --.--.--
Y1 Year time switch function relay 1
A,B,
C,D
Time switch channels
+•+ appears in the PARAMETER menu.
•- does not appear in the PARAMETER menu
ON On date: day, month, year (two-digit 2010 = 10)
OFF Off date: day, month, year (two-digit 2011 = 11)
Parameters Meaning Meaningful values
xx.--.00 Date, day 01 to 31
--.xx.00 Month 01 to 12
--.--.00 Year, two-digit 00 to 99
Selected channel
Closing delay
Off time
# Contact has not switched.
â Contact has switched.
Y1 A+
ON 04.01.01
OFF 04.12.31
â
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 139
4.12.5 Changing time switch channel
You can change time switch channel in either RUN or STOP mode by
selecting the channel required with the cursor buttons ÍÚ
Example:
The display on the left shows the parameter display of a year time switch.
The cursor is flashing on channel A.
▶Press the Í button to move the cursor to channel B.
You can use the í button to reach any editable value.
Y4 A +
ON 04.01.01
OFF 04.03.31
â
Y4 B +
ON 04.10.01
OFF 04.12.31
#
Caution - important input rules!
The year time switch only operates correctly if you observe the
following rules:
•The On year must be before the Off year,
•ON and OFF times must be specified the same in pairs.
Example of entries in pairs:
•ON = Day/--/--, OFF = Day/--/--
The ON day should normally have a smaller value than the OFF
day, otherwise the special case applies
(￫section “ Example 8: Selecting a time range of two days
spanning the turn of the year (2-channel)”, page 145).
•ON = --/--/Year, OFF = --/--/Year,
•ON = --/Month/Year, OFF = --/Month/Year
•ON = Day/Month/Year, OFF = Day/Month/Year
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
140 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.12.6 Entry rules
The following nine entry rules are possible.
Display format: XX = digit used
4.12.6.1 Rule 1
ON: Day
OFF: Day
4.12.6.2 Rule 2
ON: Month
OFF: Month
4.12.6.3 Rule 3
ON: Year
OFF: Year
4.12.6.4 Rule 4
ON: Day/month
OFF: Day/month
4.12.6.5 Rule 5
ON: Month/year
OFF: Month/year
Y1 A +
ON XX.--.--
OFF XX.--.--
Y1 A +
ON --.XX.--
OFF --.XX.--
Y1 A +
ON --.--.XX
OFF --.--.XX
Y1 A +
ON XX.XX.--
OFF XX.XX.--
Y1 A +
ON --.XX.XX
OFF --.XX.XX
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 141
4.12.6.6 Rule 6
ON: Day/month/year
OFF: Day/month/year
4.12.6.7 Rule 7
Two-channel
Channel A ON: Day/month
Channel B OFF: Day/month
4.12.6.8 Rule 8
Two-channel
Channel ON: Day/month/year
Channel D OFF: Day/month/year
With this rule, the same year number must be entered in each channel in the
ON and OFF entry area.
4.12.6.9 Rule 9
Overlapping channels:
The first ON date switches on and the first OFF date switches off.
Overlapping channels:
The first ON date switches on and the first OFF date switches off.
Y1 A +
ON XX.XX.XX
OFF XX.XX.XX
Y1 A +
ON XX.XX.--
OFF --.--.--
Y1 B +
ON --.--.--
OFF XX.XX.--
Y1 B +
ON XX.XX.XX
OFF --.--.XX
Y1 D +
ON --.--.XX
OFF XX.XX.XX
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
142 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.12.7 Function of the year time switch
The year time switch can switch ranges, individual days, months, years or
combinations of all three.
4.12.7.1 Years
ON: 2002 to OFF: 2010 means:
Recurring interval, switch on at 00:00 2002-01-01 00:00 and off at 00:00
2011-01-01.
4.12.7.2 Months
ON: 04 to OFF: 10 means:
Recurring interval, switch on at 00:00 April 1, and off at 00:00 November 1.
4.12.7.3 Days
ON: 02 to OFF: 25 means:
Recurring interval, switch on at 00:00 on day 2 of the month and off at 00:00
day 26, i.e. after the set day has fully elapsed.
4.12.8 Year time switch for sample parameter configurations
4.12.8.1 Configuring the parameters for recurring intervals
Example 1: Selecting year range (1-channel)
The year time switch Y1 is required to switch on at 00:00 on January 1 2010
and stay on until 00:00 January 1 2012.
Figure 74: Select year range
￫Avoid making incomplete entries. It hinders transparency and
leads to unwanted functions.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year
time switch Y1
1/1 31/12
2009 2010 2011 2012
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 A +
ON --.--.10
OFF --.--.11
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 143
4.12.8.2 Example 2: Selecting month ranges (1-channel)
The year time switch Y2 is required to switch on at 00:00 on March 1 and
stay on until 00:00 October 1.
Figure 75: Select month range
4.12.8.3 Example 3:Selecting day ranges (1-channel)
The year time switch Y3 is required to switch on at 00:00 on day 1 of each
month and switch off at 00:00 on day 29 of each month.
Figure 76: Select day range
4.12.8.4 Example 4: Selecting public holidays (1-channel)
The year time switch Y4 is required to switch on at 00:00 on day 25.12 of
each year and switch off at 00:00 on day 27.12 of each year. “Christmas
program”.
Figure 77: Select public holiday
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year
time switch Y2
1/3 30/9
... 2010 2011
1/3 30/9 1/3 30/9 1/3
2012 2013 ...
Y2-------ÄQ1
Y2 A +
ON __.03.--
OFF --.09.--
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year
time switch Y3
1
28 28 28
111
Januar Februar März April
Y3-------ÄQ1
Y3 A +
ON 01.--.--
OFF 28.--.--
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year time switch Y4
26/12
... 2010 2011
26/12 26/12
25 25 25
2012 2013 ...
Y4-------ÄQ1
Y4 A +
ON 25.12.--
OFF 26.12.--
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
144 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.12.8.5 Example 5: Specific days of specific months (1-channel)
The year time switch Y01 is required to switch on at 0:00 on day 9 of months
6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 of each year and switch off at 00:00 on day 17 of the month.
Figure 78: Chose specific days of specific months
4.12.8.6 Configuring the parameters for continuous periods of time
The following examples show how to configure the parameters for
continuous periods of time in which the time switch remains continuously
switched on. The parameter definition is carried out in pairs on two adjacent
channels.
Example 6: Time range for each year (2-channel)
The year time switch Y1 is required to switch on at 00:00 on day 02.05 of
each year and stay on continuously until 00:00 on 1.11 of each year.
“Open air season”.
Figure 79: Select time range for each year
① + ② First and last on year as well as
③ + ④ First and last off year are unlimited here
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year time switch Y1
16 16 16
999
... Juli August September ...
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 A +
ON 09.06.--
OFF 16.10.--
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year
time switch Y1
31/10
... 2010 2011
31/10 31/10 31/10
2/5 2/5 2/5
2012 ...
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 A +
ON 02.05.--
OFF --.--.--
a
b
Y1 B +
ON --.--.--
OFF 31.10.--
c
d
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 145
Example 7: Selecting a time range for a limited number of years
(2-channel)
The Y1 year time switch should switch on at 00:00, on 05/02, in the years
2011 and 2012, and remain switched on until 00:00 on 11/1 in each case.
Figure 80: Select a time range for a limited number of years
① First and ② last on year.
③ First and ④ last off year.
Example 8: Selecting a time range of two days spanning the turn of the
year (2-channel)
The Y1 year time switch should switch on at 00:00 on 12/31 of every year
and remain continuously switched on until 00:00 on 02/01 of every year.
Figure 81: Select a time range of two days spanning the turn of the year
① + ② First and last on year as well as
③ + ④ First and last off year are unlimited here
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
year time switch Y1
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the year
time switch Y1
31/10
20112010 2012
31/10
2/5 2/5
2013
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 A +
ON 02.05.11
OFF --.--.12
a
b
Y1 B +
ON --.--.11
OFF 12.10.31
c
d
1/1
... 2010 2011
1/1 1/1
31
12
1/1
31
12
31
12
31
12
2012 ...
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 A +
ON 31.12.--
OFF --.--.--
a
b
Y1 B +
ON --.--.--
OFF 01.01.--
c
d
4 Wiring with
4.12 Year Time Switch
146 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Example 9: Selecting a time range of two days spanning the turn of the
year on 2010/2011, 2011/2012 (2-channel)
The Y1 year time switch should switch on at 00:00 on 12/31 of 2010 and
remain switched on until 00:00 on 01/02 of 2011,
and switch on at 00:00 on 12/31 of 2011 and remain switched on until 00:00
on 01/02 of 2012.
Figure 82: Select a time range of two days spanning the turn of the year
① First and ② last on year.
③ First and ④ last off year.
Example 10: Overlapping time ranges (2-channel)
This example shows how to configure the parameters for continuous
overlapping time ranges on adjacent channels.
The Y1 year time switch, channel C, switches on at 00:00 on the third of
months 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and remains switched on until 00:00 on the 26th of
these months.
The Y1 year time switch, channel D, switches on at 00:00 on the second of
months 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 and remains switched on until 00:00 on the 18th
of these months.
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
year time switch Y1
Circuit diagram display Parameter settings of the
year time switch Y1
1/1
2010 2011
1/1
31
12
31
12
2012
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 A +
ON 31.12.10
OFF --.--.11
a
b
Y1 B +
ON --.--.11
OFF 12.01.01
c
d
Y1-------ÄQ1
Y1 C +
ON 03.05.--
OFF 25.10.--
①
Y1 D +
ON 02.06.--
OFF 17.12.--
②
4 Wiring with
4.13 Master Reset
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 147
Total result corresponding to the channel configurations and behavior of
contact Y1 in this example:
The time switch switches on at 00:00 on 3 May and stays on until 00:00 on
26 May.
In June, July, August, September, October, the time switch will switch on at
00:00 on day 2 of the month and switch off at 00:00 on day 18.
In November and December, the time switch will switch on at 00:00 on the
second of the month and switch off until 00:00 on the 18th. The following
note explains this switching behavior.
4.13 Master Reset
The master reset function relay enables you to set with one command the
status of the markers and all outputs to “0”. Depending on the operating
mode of this function relay, it is possible to reset the outputs only, or the
markers only, or both. Three function blocks are available.
4.13.0.1 Wiring of the master reset function relay
You integrate a master reset function relay into your circuit in the form of a
contact and coil.
The coils and contacts have the following meanings:
￫Switching behavior with overlapping channel settings:
If parameterized ranges overlap, the year time switch switches
the contact on with the first detected ON, irrespective of which
channel supplies this ON signal. In the same way, the year time
switch switches the contact off with the first detected OFF,
irrespective of whether another channel still supplies the ON
signal!
Master reset Z1…Z3 (central reset)
Boolean inputs/outputs Parameters
Contact Coil Input value Output value
Z1 State of the coil
Ä1Reset of outputs Q - - - -
Ä2Reset of marker ranges
M.. + N..
Ä3Reset all
N8-------ÄZ1
Q3-------ÄZ2
I8-------ÄZ3
Z1-Z2-Z3-ÅQ2
Contact Coil
Z1 - Z3 Contact of the master
reset
ÄZ1 - ÄZ3 Coil of the master reset
4 Wiring with
4.13 Master Reset
148 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.13.1 Operating modes
The different coils of the master reset have different operating modes:
•Z1: For Q outputs: controls outputs Q1 to Q8 and S1 to S8.
•Z2: For markers M, N: controls the marker range M1 to M16 and N1 to
N16.
•Z3: for outputs and markers: controls Q1 to Q8, S1 to S8, M1 to M16 and
N1 to N16.
4.13.2 Function of the master reset function relay
A rising edge or the "1" signal on the coil will reset the outputs or markers to
"0", depending on the operating mode set. The location of the coil in the
circuit diagram is of no importance. The master reset always has the highest
priority.
The contacts Z1 to Z3 follow the status of their own coil.
4.13.2.1 Example: resetting outputs
All outputs that you have used can be reset to 0 with one command.
A rising edge at the coil of Z1 will cause all Q and S outputs to be reset.
4.13.2.2 Example: resetting markers
All markers that you have used can be reset to 0 with one command.
A rising edge at the coil of Z2 will cause all markers M and N to be reset.
4.13.2.3 Example: resetting outputs and markers
All outputs and markers that you have used can be reset to 0 with one
command.
A rising edge at the coil of Z3 will cause all Q and S outputs and all M and N
markers to be reset.
I8-------ÈZ1
I5-------ÄQ1
I2-M1-T1-SS3
M3uC1----SQ3
M4b
I8-------ÈZ2
I5-------ÄM1
I2-M1-T1-SN3
M3uC1----SM8
M4b
I8-------ÈZ3
I5-------ÄQ1
I2-M1-T1-SS3
M3uC1----SQ3
M4b
I1-------ÄM1
I7-C2-T1-SN3
T3-A1----SM8
M4-A5----SN8
4 Wiring with
4.14 Basic circuits
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 149
4.14 Basic circuits
The values in the logic table have the following meanings
For switch contacts:
•0 = N/O contact open, N/C contact closed
•1 = N/O contact closed, N/C contact open
For Q…: relay coils
•0 = coil not energized
•1 = coil energized
4.14.1 Negation (contact)
Negation means that the contact opens rather than closes when it is
actuated (NOT circuit).
In the easy circuit diagram, press the ALT button to toggle contact I1
between N/C and N/O contact.
Table 16: Negation
4.14.2 Negation (coil)
Negation means in this case that the coil opens when the N/O contact is
actuated (NOT circuit).
In the easy circuit diagram example, you only change the coil function
Table 17: Negation
4.14.3 Permanent contact
To energize a relay coil continuously, make a connection of all contact fields
from the coil to the leftmost position.
Table 18: Permanent contact
I1-------ÄQ1
I1 Q1
1 0
0 1
I1-------ÅQ1
I1 Q1
1 0
0 1
---------ÄQ1
--- Q1
… 1
4 Wiring with
4.14 Basic circuits
150 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.14.4 Series circuit
Q1 is controlled by a series circuit consisting of three make contacts (AND
circuit).
Q2 is controlled by a series circuit consisting of three break contacts (NOR
circuit).
In the easy circuit diagram, you can connect up to three N/O or N/C contacts
in series within a rung. Use M marker relays if you need to connect more
than three N/O contacts in series.
Table 19: Series circuit
4.14.5 Parallel connection
Q1 is controlled by a parallel circuit consisting of several N/O contacts (OR
circuit).
A parallel circuit of N/C contacts controls Q2 (NAND circuit).
Table 20: Parallel connection
I1-I2-I3-ÄQ1
I1-I2-I3-ÄQ2
I1 I2 I3 Q1 Q2
0000 1
0010 0
0100 0
0110 0
1000 0
1010 0
1100 0
1111 0
I1u------ÄQ1
I2s
I3k
I1u------ÄQ2
I2s
I3k
I1 I2 I3 Q1 Q2
0000 1
0011 1
0101 1
0111 1
1001 1
1011 1
1101 1
1111 0
4 Wiring with
4.14 Basic circuits
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 151
4.14.6 Parallel circuit operating like a series connection of make contacts
A series circuit with more than three contacts (N/O contacts) can be
implemented with a parallel circuit of N/C contacts on a negated coil.
In the easy circuit diagram you can switch as many rungs in parallel as you
have rungs available.
Table 21: Parallel connection of N/C contacts on a negated coil
I1u------ÅQ1
I2s
I3s
I4s
I5k
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 Q1
000000
000010
000100
000110
001000
001010
001100
001110
010000
010010
010100
010110
011000
……………0
……………0
111111
4 Wiring with
4.14 Basic circuits
152 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.14.7 Parallel circuit operating like a series connection of break contacts
A series circuit with more than three contacts (N/C contacts) can be
implemented with a parallel connection of N/O contacts on a negated coil.
In the easy circuit diagram you can switch as many rungs in parallel as you
have rungs available.
Table 22: Parallel connection of N/O contacts on a negated coil
4.14.8 Two way switch
A two-way circuit is made in easy using two series connections that are
combined to form a parallel circuit (XOR).
An XOR circuit stands for an “Exclusive Or” circuit. The coil is only energized
if one contact is activated.
Table 23: Two-way circuit (XOR)
I1u------ÅQ1
I2s
I3s
I4s
I5k
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 Q1
000001
000010
000100
000110
001000
001010
001100
001110
010000
010010
……………0
……………0
111110
I1-I2u---ÄQ1
I1-I2k
I1 I2 Q1
000
011
101
110
4 Wiring with
4.14 Basic circuits
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 153
4.14.9 Self maintaining
A combination of a series and parallel connection is used to wire a latching
circuit.
Latching is established by contact Q1 which is connected in parallel to I1.
When I1 is actuated and reopened, the current flows via contact Q1 until I2 is
actuated.
Table 24: Self maintaining
Latching circuits are used to switch machines on and off. The machine is
switched on at the input terminals via normally open contact S1 and is
switched off via normally closed contact S2.
S2 breaks the connection to the control voltage in order to switch off the
machine. This ensures that the machine can be switched off, even in the
event of a wire break. I2 is always closed when not actuated.
Alternatively the latching circuit can also be set up with the wire break
function using the “Set” and “Reset” coil functions.
Coil Q1 latches if I1 is activated. I2 inverts the break contact signal of S2 and
only switches if S2 is activated in order to disconnect the machine or in the
event of a wire breakage.
Make sure that both coils are wired up in the correct order in the easy circuit
diagram: first wire the S coil and then the R coil. This will ensure that the
machine will be switched off when I2 is actuated, even if I1 is switched on.
I1uI2----ÄQ1
Q1k
S1 N/O contact at I1
S2 N/C contact on I2
I1 I2 Contact Q1 Coil Q1
000 0
010 0
100 0
110 1
001 0
011 1
101 0
111 1
I1-------SQ1
I2-------RQ1
S1 N/O contact at I1
S2 N/C contact on I2
4 Wiring with
4.14 Basic circuits
154 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.14.10 Impulse relays
An impulse relay is often used for controlling lighting, such as stairwell
lighting.
Table 25: Impulse relays
4.14.11 Cycle pulse on rising edge
You can create a cycle pulse on a rising edge if you use the appropriate coil
function.
This is very useful for count pulses, jump pulses.
Table 26: Cycle pulse on rising edge
4.14.12 Cycle pulse on falling edge
You can create a cycle pulse on a falling edge if you use the appropriate coil
function.
This is very useful for count pulses, jump pulses.
Table 27: Cycle pulse on falling edge
I1-------äQ1
S1 N/O contact at I1
I1 Status of Q1 Q1
00 0
01 1
10 1
11 0
I1-------ÈQ1
S1 N/O contact at I1
I1 Status of Q1 cycle n Status of Q1 cycle n + 1
0 0 0
1 1 0
0 0 0
I1-------èQ1
S1 N/O contact at I1
I1 Status of Q1 cycle n Status of Q1 cycle n + 1
1 0 0
01 0
10 0
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 155
4.15 Circuit examples
4.15.1 Star-delta starting
You can implement two star-delta circuits with easy. The advantage of easy
is that it is possible to select the changeover time between star and delta
contactors, and also the time delay between switching off the star contactor
and switching on the delta contactor.
Figure 83: Star-delta circuit with conventional contactors
Figure 84: Star-delta circuit with easy
NQ11
Q11
Q11
K1
K1
Q12
Q12
Q13
Q13
L
S1
S2
Q12
11
22
Q1
I1
LN
Q2
Q12 Q12
Q11
N
Q11
L
N
S1
S2
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
156 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.15.1.1 Function of the -circuit diagram:
Start/Stop of circuit with the external actuators S1 and S2. The mains
contactor starts the timing relay in the logic relay.
•I1: Mains contactor switched on
•Q1: Star contactor ON
•Q2: Delta contactor ON
•T1: Star-delta changeover time (10 to 30 s, X)
•T2: Wait time between star off, delta on (30, 40, 50, 60 ms, X)
If your easy has an integral time switch, you can combine star-delta starting
with the time switch function. In this case, use easy to also switch the mains
contactor.
4.15.2 4x shift register
You can use a shift register for storing an item of information, such as for the
sorting of parts into good and bad, for two, three or four transport steps
further on.
A shift pulse and the value ("0" or "1") to be shifted are needed for the shift
register.
The shift register's Reset input is used to clear any values that are no longer
needed. The values in the shift register go through the register in the order:
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th storage location.
Figure 85: Block diagram of the 4-way shift register
Table 28: Shift Register
I1u------TT1
dT1----ÄQ1
dT1----TT2
hT2----ÄQ2
Pulse Value Storage position
1 2 3 4
111 0 0 0
200 1 0 0
300 0 1 0
411 0 0 1
500 1 0 0
Reset = 1 0 0 0 0
1234
Speicherstellen
TAKT WERT RESET
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 157
Assign the information “bad” to value 0. Should the shift register be
accidentally deleted, no bad parts will be reused.
•I1: Shift pulse (PULSE)
•I2: Information (good/bad) to be shifted (VALUE)
•I3: Clear content of the shift register (RESET)
•M1: 1st storage location
•M2: 2nd storage location
•M3: 3rd storage location
•M4: 4th storage location
•M7: Marker relay for cycle pulse
•M8: Cyclical pulse for shift pulse
Figure 86: easy circuit diagram shift register
4.15.2.1 How does the shift register work?
The shift pulse is activated for exactly one cycle. To do this, the shift pulse is
generated by evaluating the change from I1 OFF to I1 ON – the rising edge.
In this way, therefore, the cyclical processing of easy is used to trigger the
shift pulse.
When I1 is activated for the first time, the marker relay N/C contact M7 is
closed during the first pass through the cycle. Thus, the series connection
consisting of I1, N/C contact M7 (closed) and M8 is activated. Although M7 is
now also activated, this does not yet have any effect on contact M7.
The contact of M8 (N/O contact) was still open during the first cycle so a shift
pulse cannot yet be generated. When the relay coil is activated, easy
transfers the result to the contacts.
In the second cycle N/C contact M7 is open. The series connection is
opened. The contact M8 is activated from the result of the first cycle. Now,
all the storage locations are either set or reset in accordance with the series
connection.
Generate shift pulse
4th memory position, set
4th memory position, delete
3rd memory position, set
3rd memory position, delete
2nd memory position, set
2nd memory position, delete
1st memory position, set
1st memory position, delete
Delete all memory positions
I1uM7----ÄM8
h------ÄM7
M8uM3----SM4
dM3----RM4
dM2----SM3
dM2----RM3
dM1----SM2
dM1----RM2
dI2----SM1
hI2----RM1
I3------uRM1
dRM2
dRM3
hRM4
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
158 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
If the relay coils were activated, easy transfers the result to the contacts. M8
is now open again. No new pulse can be formed until I1 has opened, since
M7 is open for as long as I1 is closed.
4.15.2.2 How does the value reach the shift register?
When shift pulse M8 = ON, the state of I2 (VALUE) is transferred to storage
location M1.
If I2 is activated, M1 is set. If I2 is deactivated, M1 is deactivated via break
contact I2.
4.15.2.3 How is the result shifted?
easy activates the coils in accordance with the rung and its result, from top
to bottom. M4 assumes the value of M3 (value 0 or 1) before M3 assumes
the value of M2. M3 assumes the value of M2, M2 the value of M1 and M1
the value of I2.
4.15.2.4 Why are the values not constantly overwritten?
In this example, the coils are controlled only by the S and R functions, i.e. the
values are retained in on or off states even though the coil is not constantly
activated. The state of the coil changes only if the rung up to the coil is
activated. In this circuit, the marker relay is therefore either set or reset. The
rungs of the coils (storage locations) are only activated via M8 for one cycle
time. The result of activating the coils is stored in easy until a new pulse
changes the state of the coils.
4.15.2.5 How are all the storage locations cleared?
When I3 is activated, all the R coils of storage locations M1 to M4 are reset,
i.e. the coils are deactivated. Since the reset was entered at the end of the
circuit diagram, the reset function has priority over the set function.
4.15.2.6 How can the value of a storage location be transferred?
Use the N/O or N/C contact of storage locations M1 to M4 and wire them to
an output relay or in the circuit diagram according to the task required.
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 159
4.15.3 Running light
An automatic running light can be created by slightly modifying the shift
register circuit.
One relay is always switched on. It starts at Q1, runs through to Q4 and then
starts again at Q1.
The marker relays for storage locations M1 to M4 are replaced by relays Q1
to Q4.
The shift pulse I1 has been automated by the flasher relay T1. The cycle
pulse M8 remains as it is.
On the first pass, the value is switched on once by N/C contact M9. If Q1 is
set, M9 is switched on. Once Q4 (the last storage location) has been
switched on, the value is passed back to Q1.
Try changing the times.
Figure 87: easy run light circuit diagram
T1 Ü S +
I1 00.50
I2 00.50
Flasher relay
Generate shift pulse
Clear first value
4th memory position, set
4th memory position, delete
3rd memory position, set
3rd memory position, delete
2nd memory position, set
2nd memory position, delete
1st memory position, set
Enter first value (=1)
1st memory position, delete
---------DD1
T1uM7----ÄM8
h------ÄM7
Q1-------SM9
M8uQ3----SQ4
dQ4----RQ4
dQ2----SQ3
dQ3----RQ3
dQ1----SQ2
dQ2----RQ2
dQ4u---SQ1
dM9k
hQ1----RQ1
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
160 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
4.15.4 Stairwell lighting
For a conventional circuit you would need at least five space units in the
distribution board, i.e. one impulse relay, two timing relays and two auxiliary
relays.
easy requires only four space units. A fully functioning stairwell lighting
system can be set up with five terminals and the easy circuit diagram.
Figure 88: Conventional stairwell lighting
￫Up to twelve such stairwell circuits can be implemented with
one easy device.
N
L
S1
S2
S3
K3T Q1 K2T
Q4
Q4
Q5
Q5
K3T Q1
K2T
Q5
Q5
5 s 6 min
E1
E2
E3
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 161
Figure 89: Stairwell lighting with easy
Button pressed briefly Light ON or OFF. The impulse relay function will even switch off Continuous lighting.
Light off after 6 min. with Continuous lighting this function is not active.
Button pressed for more
than 5 s
continuous light
N
L
S1
S2
S3
E1
E2
E3
12
Q1
I1
LN
4 Wiring with
4.15 Circuit examples
162 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Figure 90: easy circuit diagram stairwell lighting
Meaning of the contacts and relays used:
•I1: ON/OFF pushbutton
•Q1: Output relay for light ON/OFF
•M1: Marker relay.This is used to block the “switch off automatically after
6 minutes” function for continuous lighting.
•T1 Cycle pulse for switching Q1 on and off, (ü, single-pulse with value
00.00 s)
•T2 Scan to determine how long the button was pressed. If pressed
longer than 5 s, continuous lighting is switched on (X, on-delayed, value
5s).
•T3 switch off after a lighting time of 6 min. (X, on-delayed, value
6:00 min).
•T4 Switch off after 4 hours continuous lighting (X, on-delayed,
value 4:00 h).
If you are using a control relay with a time switch, you can define both the
stairwell lighting and the continuous lighting periods via the time switch. If
you use a control relay with analog inputs, you can optimize the stairwell
lighting with a brightness sensor to suit the lighting conditions.
The easy circuit diagram for the
functions described above looks
like this:
The enhanced easy circuit
diagram: after four hours, the
continuous lighting is also
switched off.
I1-------TT2
T2-------SM1
I1u------äQ1
T3k
Q1-M1----TT3
Q1-------RM1
I1------uTT1
hTT2
T2-------SM1
T1u------äQ1
T3s
T4k
Q1uM1----TT3
h------TT4
Q1-------RM1
5 settings
5.1 Password protection
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 163
5 settings
All easy settings carried out on the device require the use of the button field
and display. Alternatively, you can carry out all easy settings with the
easySoft programming software.
5.1 Password protection
The easy can be protected by a password against unauthorized access.
In this case the password consists of a value between 0001 and 9999. You
can use the number combination 0000 to delete a password.
Password protection inhibits access to selected areas. The System menu is
always protected when a password is activated.
The password can protect the following entries and areas:
•Start or modification of the program
•Transfer of a circuit diagram to or from a memory card (Display variants).
•the transfer of a circuit diagram from and to the memory card
•Change of the RUN or STOP mode.
•Calling and modification of function block parameters.
•All settings of the real-time clock.
•Modifications of all system parameters.
•Communication with the individual device.
•Disabling of the password delete function.
￫Default settings:
0000, no password present and none active, circuit diagram
area selected.
￫A password that has been entered in easy is transferred to the
memory card together with the circuit diagram, irrespective of
whether it was activated or not.
If this easy circuit diagram is loaded back from the memory
card, the password will also be transferred to easy and is
activated immediately.
5 settings
5.1 Password protection
164 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.1.1 Password setup
A password can be set up via the System menu in either RUN or STOP
mode. You cannot change to the System menu if a password is already
activated.
▶Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
▶Select the menu option SECURITY… to enter the password.
▶Press the OK button and move to the PASSWORD… menu.
▶Press OK again to enter the Password entry mode.
If no password has been entered, easy changes directly to the password
display and displays for XXXX characters: No password present.
▶Press OK, four zeros will appear
▶Set the password using the cursor buttons:
•úí select position in the password,
•ÍÚ Select a value between 0 and 9.
▶Save the new password by pressing OK.
Use OK to exit the password display and proceed with ESC and Ú to the
RANGE… menu.
The scope of the password has not yet been defined. The password is now
valid but not yet activated.
5.1.2 Selecting the scope of the password
▶Press the OK button.
▶Select the function or the menu to be protected.
▶Press the OK button in order to protect the function or menu
(tick = protected).
•CIRCUIT DIAG: The password is effective on the program with circuit
diagram and non-enabled function relays.
•PARAMETER: The PARAMETER menu is protected.
•CLOCK: Date and time are protected with the password.
•OPERATING MODE: The toggling of the RUN or STOP operating mode is
protected.
•INTERFACE: The interface is blocked for access with easySoft
(-Basic, -Pro).
•DELETE FUNCT: The question DELETE PROG? will appear on the device
after four incorrect password entries have been made. This prompt is not
displayed if selected. However, it is no longer possible to make changes
in protected areas if you forget the password.
ENTER PASSW
âXXX
ENTER PASSW
0042
CIRCUIT DIAGåÆ
PARAMETER
CLOCK
OPRTNG MODE æ
INTERFACE
DELETE FUNCT
￫Standard protection encompasses the programs and circuit
diagram.
At least one function or menu must be protected.
5 settings
5.1 Password protection
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 165
5.1.3 Activating Passwords
You can activate a valid password in three different ways:
•automatically when easy is switched on again
•automatically after a protected circuit diagram is loaded
•via the password menu
▶Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
▶Open the password menu via the SECURITY… menu
easy will only show this menu if a password is present.
▶Select ACTIVATE PW and press OK.
The password is now active. easy changes back automatically to the Status
display.
You must unlock easy with the password before you carry out a protected
function, enter a protected menu or the System menu.
5.1.4 unlocking
Unlocking easy will deactivate the password. You can reactivate password
protection later via the Password menu or by switching the power supply off
and on again.
▶Press OK to switch to the main menu.
The PASSWORD... entry will flash.
▶Press OK to enter the password entry menu.
CHANGE PW
ACTIVATE
￫Make a notes of the password before activating it. If the
password is no longer known, easy can be unlocked
(DELETE FUNCT is not active), but the circuit diagram and data
settings are lost. The interface must not be disabled.
CAUTION
If the password is unknown or lost, and the password delete
function is not activated: The unit can only be reset to the
factory setting by the manufacturer. The program and all data
will be lost.
PASSWORD...
STOP RUN å
PASSWORD...
INFO
￫If easy shows PROGRAM… in the main menu instead of
PASSWORD…, this means that there is no password protection
active.
5 settings
5.1 Password protection
166 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
easy will display the password entry field.
▶Set the password using the cursor buttons:
▶Confirm with OK.
If the password is correct, easy will switch automatically to the Status
display.
The PROGRAM… menu option is now accessible so that you can edit your
circuit diagram.
The System menu is also accessible.
5.1.5 Changing or deleting the password range
▶Unlock easy.
▶Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
▶Open the password menu via the menu option SECURITY →
PASSWORD…
The CHANGE PW entry flashes.
easy will only show this menu if a password is present.
▶Press OK to enter the password entry menu.
▶Press OK to move to the 4-digit entry field.
▶Four zeros will be displayed
▶Modify the four password digits using the cursor buttons.
▶Confirm with OK.
Press ESC to exit the security area.
5.1.5.1 Delete
Use number combination 0000 to delete a password.
If a password has not been entered already, easy will show four XXXX.
ENTER PASSW
XXXX
PROGRAM...
STOP
PARAMETER
INFO
CHANGE PW
ACTIVATE PW
ENTER PASSW
XXXX
ENTER PASSW
1789
ENTER PASSW
0000
5 settings
5.2 Changing the menu language
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 167
5.1.6 Password incorrect or no longer known
If you no longer know the exact password, you can try to re-enter the
password several times.
Have you entered an incorrect password?
▶Re-enter the password.
After the fourth entry attempt easy will ask whether you wish to delete the
circuit diagram and data.
▶Press
•ESC: Circuit diagram, data or password are not deleted.
•OK: Circuit diagram, data and password are deleted.
easy will return to the Status display.
Pressing ESC will retain the circuit diagram and data. You can then make
another four attempts to enter the password.
5.2 Changing the menu language
easy500 and easy700 provide twelve menu languages which are set as
required via the System menu.
￫The DELETE FUNCT function has not been deactivated.
ENTER PASSW
XXXX
DELETE ?
￫If you no longer know the exact password, you can press OK to
unlock the protected easy. The saved circuit diagram and all
function relay parameters will be lost.
Language Display
English ENGLISH
Deutsch DEUTSCH
French FRANCAIS
Spanish ESPANOL
Italian ITALIANO
Portuguese PORTUGUES
Dutch NEDERLANDS
Swedish SVENSKA
Polish POLSKI
Turkish TURKCE
Czech CESKY
Hungarian MAGYAR
￫Language selection is only possible if easy is not password-
protected.
5 settings
5.3 Alter parameters
168 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
▶Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
▶Select LANGUAGE… to change the menu language.
The language selection for the first entry ENGLISH is displayed.
▶Use Í or Ú to select the new menu language, e.g. Italian (ITALIANO).
▶Confirm with OK. ITALIANO is assigned a tick.
▶Exit the menu with ESC.
easy will now show the new menu language.
Press ESC to return to the Status display.
5.3 Alter parameters
easy allows you to change function relay parameters such as timing relay
setpoint values and counter setpoints without having to call up the circuit
diagram. This is possible regardless of whether easy is running a program or
is in STOP mode.
▶Press OK to switch to the main menu.
▶Start the parameter display by selecting PARAMETER.
All function relays are displayed as a list.
The following preconditions must be fulfilled in order for a parameter set to
be displayed:
•A function relay must have been included in the circuit diagram.
•The PARAMETER menu must be available.
•The parameter set must have been enabled for access, indicated by the
+ character at the bottom right of the display.
ENGLISH Æ
DEUTSCH å
FRANCAIS
ESPANOL æ
ITALIANO
PORTUGUES
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
POLSKI
TURKCE
CESKY
MAGYAR
SICUREZZA
SISTEMA...
LINGUA MENU
CONFIGURA…
T3 Ü S+
T8 X M:S +
C4 N +
O3 +
Ö2+
A1 EQ +
A3 LT +
￫You can enable or disable parameter access using the “+” or “–
” parameter set characters in the circuit diagram.
5 settings
5.3 Alter parameters
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 169
▶Select the required function block with Í or Ú .
▶Press the OK button.
▶Use the cursor buttons Í or Ú to scroll through the parameters.
▶Change the values for a parameter set:
•Press OK to enter the Entry mode,
•Press úí to change decimal place,
•Press ÍÚ to change the value of a decimal place,
•Press OK to save constants or
•ESC Retain previous setting.
Press ESC to leave the parameter display.
5.3.1 Adjustable parameters for function relays
You can also modify the function relay parameters used in the circuit diagram
in the PARAMETER menu.
Adjustable setpoint values are:
•With all function relays the setpoints
•On and off times with time switches.
In RUN mode easy operates with a new setpoint as soon as it has been
modified in the parameter display and saved with OK.
5.3.1.1 Example: Changing switch times for outdoor lighting
The outdoor lighting of a building is automatically switched on from 19:00 to
23:30 Mondays to Fridays in the easy circuit diagram.
The parameter set for the time switch function relay 1 is saved in channel A
and looks like this.
From the following weekend, the outdoor lighting is now also required to
switch on between 19:00 and 22:00 on Saturdays.
▶Select PARAMETER from the main menu.
The first parameter set is displayed.
▶Use Í or Ú to scroll through the parameter sets until channel A of time
switch 1 is displayed.
▶Press Í to select the next empty parameter set, in this case channel B of
time switch 1.
The current time is 15:21.
▶Change the value for the day interval from MO to SA:
•úí Move between the parameters
•ÍÚ Change value.
▶Press OK to acknowledge the value SA.
T3 Ü S +
I1 02,030
I2 05,000
T:
Ö1 A 15:21 +
D MO-FR
ON 19:00
OFF 23:30
Ö1 B 15:21 +
D --
ON 00:00
OFF 00:00
Ö1 B 15:21 +
D SA
ON 00:00
OFF 00:00
5 settings
5.4 Setting date and time
170 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
▶Change the ON value to 19:00.
▶Move to the value of ON
▶Press OK
•úí Move between the parameters
•ÍÚ Change value.
▶Press OK to acknowledge the value 19:00.
▶Set the switching off time to 22:00.
▶Press OK.
easy will save the new parameters. The cursor will remain in the contact field
on channel identifier B.
Press ESC to leave the parameter display.
The time switch will now also switch on at 19:00 on Saturdays and switch off
at 22:00.
5.4 Setting date and time
The easy500 and easy700 devices are equipped with a real-time clock with
date and time functions. The type reference is EASY…-…-.C. The time
switch function relays can thus be used to implement time switch
applications.
5.4.1 Set time
If the clock is not set or easy is switched on after the battery back-up time
has elapsed, the clock starts with the setting "SA 0:01 01.05.2004“ The easy
clock operates with date and time so that hour, minute, day, month and year
have to be set.
▶Select SET CLOCK… from the main menu.
This will open the menu for setting the time.
▶Select SET CLOCK and confirm with OK.
▶Set the values for time, day, month and year.
▶Press the OK button to access the Entry mode.
•úí Select the position.
•ÍÚ Change the value of a parameter
•OK Save day and time.
•ESC Retain previous setting.
Press ESC to leave the time setting display.
Ö1 B 15:21 +
D SA
ON 19:00
OFF 00:00
Ö1 B 15:21 +
D SA
ON 19:00
OFF 22:00
￫Default settings:
"SA 0:01 01.05.2004“
SET CLOCK
SUMMER TIME
HH:MM: 18:24
DD.MM 01.05
YEAR : 2004
5 settings
5.4 Setting date and time
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 171
5.4.2 Setting summer time start and end
Most easy models are fitted with a real-time clock. The clock has various
possibilities for starting and ending the summer time (DST) setting. These
are subject to different legal requirements in the EU, GB and USA.
You can make the following settings:
•NONE: no DST setting rule.
•RULE...: User-defined date of DST change.
•EU: date defined by the European Union;
Start: last Sunday in March;
End: last Sunday in October.
•GB: Select the EU option for the statutory DST setting for the UK.
Date for the United Kingdom as per the obsolete rule that is stored in the
device;
Start: Last Sunday in March;
End: Fourth Sunday in October.
After the statutory settings have changed, the above rules for the
European Union will also apply to the United Kingdom.
•US: Set the beginning and the end of the daylight savings time via the
Rule… menu or in easySoft choose the supplied rule New North
America DST for the currently applicable DST setting.
Start: Second Sunday in March at 2:00 a.m. local time; End: First Sunday
in November at 2:00 a.m. local time.
Date for the USA as per the obsolete rule stored in the device;
Start: First Sunday in April;
End: Last Sunday in October
The following applies to all legally stipulated DST settings:
•Summer time start: On the day of time change, the clock moves forward
one hour at 2:00 to 3:00.
•Summer time end: On the day of time change, the clock moves back one
hour at 3:00 to 2:00.
Select SET CLOCK… from the main menu.
This will open the menu for setting the time.
▶Select the SUMMER TIME menu option.
￫Default settings:
No automatic DST setting present
SET CLOCK
SUMMER TIME
5 settings
5.4 Setting date and time
172 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.4.3 Setting summer time start and end
easy shows you the options for the DST change.
The standard setting is NONE for automatic DST changeover (Tick at NONE).
▶Select the required variant and press the OK button.
The rule for the European Union (EU) has been selected.
5.4.4 Summer time start and end, setting the rule
To set your own date. It is important to know what settings are possible.
The start and end of summer time is a complex calculation procedure
throughout the world. For this reason, the standard rules for the EU, US, GB
are provided in easy.
The following rules normally apply:
Table 29: DST setting rule
￫The start and end of summer time can only be set in STOP
mode.
NONE åÆ
RULE...
EU
GB æ
US
NONE Æ
RULE...
EU å
GB æ
US
When Day of week How Date
AM WD
Rule 1: change on a special date
-- -- -- ￫Table 30:
Rule 2: change on a defined day in the month
• 1st (first)
• 2nd (second)
• 3rd (third)
• 4th (fourth)
•L. (last)
• SU (Sunday)
• MO (Monday)
• TU (Tuesday)
• WE (Wednesday)
• TH (Thursday)
•FR (Friday)
• SA (Saturday)
MONTH ￫Table 30:1)
5 settings
5.4 Setting date and time
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 173
Table 30: Date parameters
5.4.4.1 Example with EU (European Union)
End of summer time
Menu in easy SUMMER END
The following rule applies:
The clock goes back one hour (-1:00) to 2:00 at 3:00 on the last Sunday in
October.
Table 31: EU Summer time end
Rule 3: change on a defined day after or before a date
1st (first) • SU (Sunday)
• MO (Monday)
• TU (Tuesday)
• WE (Wednesday)
• TH (Thursday)
•FR (Friday)
• SA (Saturday)
•AFTER THE
• BEFORE THE
￫Table 30:
1) Apart from day definitions
Day Month Hour Minute Time
difference
DD. MM HH: MM H:M
•1.
•2.
•…
•31.
• 1 (January)
• 2 (February)
•…
•12
(December)
•00
•01
•02
•03
•…
•23
•00
•01
•02
•03
•04
•…
•59
•+ 3:00
•+ 2:30
•+ 2:00
•+ 1:30
•+ 1:00
• + 00:30
•– 00:30
•– 1:00
•– 1:30
•– 2:00
•– 2:30
•– 3:00
When Day of week How Date
AM WD
When Day of week How Day Month Hour Minute Time
difference
WD DD. MM HH: MM H:M
AM
L. (last)
SU (Sunday) MONTH -- 10 (October) 03 00 - 1:00
5 settings
5.4 Setting date and time
174 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.4.4.2 Start of summer time
Menu in easy SUMMER START
The following rule applies:
The clock goes forward one hour (+1:00) to 3:00 at 2:00 on the last Sunday in
March.
Table 32: EU Start of summer time
▶Select the RULE menu.
▶Press the OK button.
The two SUMMER START (start of summer time) and SUMMER END (end
of summer time) menus are shown.
SUMMER START: set the DST time for the start of summer.
SUMMER END: set the DST time for the end of summer.
This menu appears for entering the required time settings:
When Day of week How Day Month Hour Minute Time
difference
WD DD. MM HH: MM H:M
AM
L. (last)
SU (Sunday) MONTH -- 03 (March) 02 00 + 1:00
￫If your easy is to be operated in other countries or regions of the
globe, refer to the latest legal requirements for DST on the
Internet. Use search terms like “time change”, “Daylight Saving
Time” or “DST” to find tables with the dates and times of
national DST settings.
NONE Æ
RULE...
EU
GB æ
US
SUMMER START
SUMMER END
￫If a standard rule has been selected, this will be accepted as the
rule.
Rule for day, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Lst.
Day of week
Rule 2 MONTH, AFTER, BEFORE
Date, day, month
Time, hour, minute
Time difference, summer time always + x:xx
Time difference, winter time always - x:xx
AM L.Æ
WD: SU
MONTH
TT.MM:--.03æ
HH:MM:02:00
DIFF: +1:00
5 settings
5.4 Setting date and time
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 175
5.4.4.3 Enter summer time start.
▶Press OK to reach Entry mode for the summer time start rule.
The following menu appears:
This will open the menu for setting the time.
▶Set the values for DST time change.
▶Press the OK button to access the Entry mode.
•ÍÚ Select required value.
•úí Select the position.
•ÍÚ Change the value of a parameter
•OK Save value.
•ESC Retain previous setting.
Press ESC to leave the DST setting display.
The above rule is the EU rule for the start of summer time.
SUMMER START
SUMMER END
AM L.Æ
WD: SU
MONTH
TT.MM:--.03æ
HH:MM:02:00
DIFF: +1:00
￫The menu for the end of summer time has the same structure.
The values are now entered accordingly.
￫The DIFF time difference value can be modified both for the
summer time setting and the winter time setting. The value is
always the same.
Summer time means a positive value + X:XX.
Winter time means a negative value – X:XX.
￫Behavior on 29 February
If the time change is set for 29.02. at HH.MM, the switch time
for years that are not leap years will occur on 01.03 at HH.MM.
The DST time minus the time difference should not go into
28.02. The following applies:
00:15 is put back by –30 min. New time: 28.02. 23:45
￫Behavior for summer time end on 01.01.
If 01.01. is selected for the end of summer time, ensure the
following:
The DST time minus the time difference should not go into
31.12. Otherwise the time will continue to run until the set time
minus the time difference 00:00 on the 01.01. The time will
then continue to run with 00:00.
5 settings
5.5 Activating input delay (debounce)
176 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.5 Activating input delay (debounce)
Input signals are evaluated by easy with an input delay. This enables, for
example, the trouble-free evaluation of switches and pushbutton actuators
subject to contact bounce.
High-speed counter functions are evaluated independently of the debounce
function.
However, for many applications, it is necessary to evaluate very short input
signals. In this case, the debounce function can be switched off.
▶Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
▶Select the SYSTEM menu.
The input delay (debounce) is set with the DEBOUNCE menu item.
5.5.1 Activating debounce (input delay)
If a tick å is next to DEBOUNCE indicates that this function is activated.
If this is not so, proceed as follows:
▶Select DEBOUNCE and press OK.
Debounce mode will be activated and the display will show DEBOUNCE å.
Press ESC to return to the Status display.
￫Setting the time manually within the summer time end setting:
At 3:00 on summer time end the time is to be put back by one
hour to 2:00.
The clock is set at 1:30 to 3:05. easy will interpret this as 3:05
winter time. A time change will not be carried out.
￫Default settings:
Debounce is activated.
￫If easy is password-protected you cannot open the System
menu until you have “unlocked” it.
DEBOUNCE. Æ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE
CARD MODE æ
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE
CARD MODE æ
5 settings
5.6 Activating and deactivating the P buttons
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 177
5.5.2 Deactivating debounce (input delay)
If easy is showing DEBOUNCE in the display, this means that Debounce mode
has already been deactivated.
▶Otherwise select DEBOUNCE å and press OK.
If Debounce mode is deactivated the display will show DEBOUNCE.
5.6 Activating and deactivating the P buttons
Even though the cursor buttons (P buttons) have been set as pushbutton
actuator inputs in the circuit diagram, this function is not activated
automatically. This prevents any unauthorized use of the cursor buttons. The
P buttons can be activated in the System menu.
The P buttons are activated and deactivated via the P BUTTONS menu.
▶Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
▶Select the SYSTEM menu.
▶Move the cursor to the P BUTTONS menu.
5.6.1 Activating P buttons
If easy is displaying P BUTTONS å, this means that the P buttons are active.
▶Otherwise select P BUTTONS and press OK.
easy changes the display to P BUTTONS å and the P buttons are activated.
▶Return to the status display using ESC.
￫How easy input and output signals are processed internally is
explained in (￫Section "6.2 Delay times for inputs and
outputs“, from page 189).
￫If easy is password-protected you cannot open the System
menu until you have “unlocked” it.
￫Default settings:
The P buttons are not activated.
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE
CARD MODE æ
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS å
RUN MODE
CARD MODE æ
5 settings
5.7 Star tup behavior
178 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.6.2 Function of the P buttons
The P buttons are only active in the Status display. In this display you can use
the P buttons to activate inputs in your circuit diagram.
5.6.3 Deactivating the P buttons
▶Select P BUTTONS å and press OK.
easy changes the display to P BUTTONS and the P buttons are deactivated.
5.7 Startup behavior
The startup behavior is an important aid during the commissioning phase.
The circuit diagram which easy contains is not yet fully wired up, or the
system or machine is in a state which easy is not permitted to control. The
outputs should not be controlled when easy is switched on.
5.7.1 Setting the startup behavior
Requirement: easy must contain a valid circuit diagram.
Switch to the system menu.
Specify the operating mode which easy must use when the power supply is
switched on.
￫If a text is displayed, the P buttons only function if a value entry
is not carried out.
￫If you delete a circuit diagram in easy, the P buttons are
automatically deactivated. If all circuit diagrams are loaded from
the memory card or easySoft, the set state is transferred.
￫The easy models without a display can only be started in RUN
mode.
￫Default settings:
RUN mode is activated.
￫If easy is password-protected, the System menu can only be
accessed after easy has first been “unlocked” (￫Section
"5.1.4 unlocking“, from page 165).
5 settings
5.7 Star tup behavior
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 179
5.7.1.1 Activating RUN mode
If easy is displaying RUN MODE å, easy switches to RUN mode when the
power supply is switched on.
▶Otherwise select RUN MODE and press OK.
RUN mode is activated.
▶Return to the status display using ESC.
5.7.1.2 Deactivating RUN mode
▶Select RUN MODE å and press OK.
The RUN mode function is deactivated.
The default setting for easy is for RUN MODE å to be displayed. In other
words, easy starts in RUN mode when the power is switched on.
Table 33: Startup behavior
5.7.2 Behavior when the circuit diagram is deleted
The setting for the startup behavior is an easy device function. When the
circuit diagram is deleted this does not result in the loss of the setting
selected.
5.7.3 Behavior during upload/download to card or PC
When a valid circuit diagram is transferred from easy to a memory card or the
PC or vice versa, the setting is still retained.
5.7.4 Possible Faults
easy will not start in RUN mode:
•easy does not contain a program.
•You have put easy in STOP mode (RUN MODE menu).
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE å
CARD MODE æ
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE å
CARD MODE æ
Startup behavior Menu displayed Status of easy after startup
easy starts in STOP mode RUN MODE easy is in STOP mode
easy starts in RUN mode RUN MODE åeasy is in RUN mode
￫The easy models without a display can only be started in RUN
mode.
5 settings
5.7 Star tup behavior
180 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.7.5 Card startup behavior
The startup behavior using a memory card is for applications where unskilled
personnel have to change the memory card with easy de-energized.
easy only starts in the RUN mode if a memory card with a valid program is
inserted.
If the program on the memory card is different to the program in easy, the
program from the card is loaded into easy and easy starts in RUN mode.
▶Switch to the system menu.
5.7.5.1 Activation of card mode
If easy shows CARD MODE å, easy only switches to RUN mode on power up
if a memory card with a valid program is fitted.
▶Otherwise select CARD MODE and press OK.
easy will start up with the program on the card.
▶Return to the status display using ESC.
5.7.5.2 Deactivating card mode
▶Select CARD MODE å and press OK.
The Card mode function is deactivated.
The default setting is for display of easy the CARD MODE menu, i.e. easy
starts in RUN mode without the memory card when the power is switched
on.
￫Default settings:
Card mode is not activated.
￫If easy is password-protected, the System menu can only be
accessed after easy has first been “unlocked” (￫Section
"5.1.4 unlocking“, from page 165).
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE å
CARD MODEåæ
￫Card mode only functions with the EASY-M-32K memory card.
Previous EASY-M-8K or EASY-M-16K memory cards did not
support this function.
DEBOUNCE åÆ
P BUTTONS
RUN MODE å
CARD MODE æ
5 settings
5.8 Setting the cycle time
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 181
5.8 Setting the cycle time
easy allows you to fix the cycle time. To do this, move to the SYSTEM menu
and from there to the CYCLE TIME… menu.
The cycle time can only be set in STOP mode.
easy is in STOP mode.
▶Select CYCLE-T and press OK.
The following menu appears:
▶Press OK.
You can now enter the set cycle time.
•úí Move between the parameters.
•ÍÚ Change value.
▶Press OK to acknowledge the value: e.g. 35 ms.
The set cycle time is at least 35 ms. The cycle time can be longer if easy
requires more time for processing the program.
Set cycle time value range:
between 00 and 60 ms.
5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage)
Plant and machine controls require the possibility to retentively set operating
states or actual values, i.e. the values should be retained safely even after
the power supply of a machine or plant has been switched off and should be
left unchanged until the actual value is overwritten.
￫Default settings:
The cycle time is set to 00 ms.
P BUTTONS Æ
RUN MODE å
CARD MODE å
CYCLE-T.. æ
CYCLE TIME
00 MS
CYCLE TIME
35 MS
￫The entry of a set cycle time is only useful in applications
involving two-step controllers or similar functions.
With a cycle time setting of 00 ms, easy will process the circuit
diagram and the program at the fastest possible speed. (see
also inside easy… cycle time)
￫Default settings:
The retention function is not activated.
5 settings
5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage)
182 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.9.1 Permissible markers and function relays
It is possible to retentively store (non-volatile memory) the actual values
(status) of markers, timing relays and up/down counters.
The following markers and function relays can be set to have retentive actual
values:
•Markers: M9 to M12, M13 to M16, N9 to N16
•Up/down counters: C5 to C7, C8, C13 to C16
•Text function relays: D1 to D8
•Timing relays: T7, T8, T13 to T16
5.9.2 Setting retentive behavior
Requirement: The easy500/700 control relay must be in STOP mode.
▶Switch to the system menu.
▶Switch to STOP mode.
▶Switch to the system menu.
▶Move to the SYSTEM menu and continue to the RETENTION… menu.
▶Press the OK button.
The first screen display is the selection of the marker range.
▶ÍÚ Select a range.
▶Press OK to select the marker, the function relay or the range that is to
be retentive (tick on the line).
Press ESC to exit the input for the retentive ranges.
￫To ensure that easy500 and easy700 are fully compatible with
easy400 and easy600 devices, the retentive data settings were
divided into the above areas.
CAUTION
The retentive data is kept every time the power supply is
switched off. Data security is assured for 1000000 write cycles.
￫If easy is password-protected, the System menu can only be
accessed after easy has first been “unlocked” (￫Section
"5.1.4 unlocking“, page 165from).
RUN MODE åÆ
CARD MODE
CYCLE-T...
RETENTION..æ
M 9 - M12 åÆ
M13 - M16
N 9 - N16
C 5 - C 7 åæ
C 8 å
C13 - C16
D 1 - D 8
T7
T8
T13 - T16
5 settings
5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage)
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 183
Example:
M9 to M12, counters C5 to C7, C8 as well as timing relays T7 and T8 are
retentive.Indicated by the tick on the line. Indicated by the tick on the line.
The default setting of easy is selected so that no retentive data is selected.
In this setting, easy works without retentive actual values if a valid circuit
diagram is present. When easy is in STOP mode or has been switched to a
de-energized state, all actual values are cleared.
5.9.3 Deleting retentive actual values
Requirement: The easy500/700 control relay is must be in STOP mode.
The retentive actual values are cleared, i.e. reset to 0 if:
•a new program is transferred without an activated retentive range from
the easySoft or memory card to the control relay.
This also applies if there is no program on the memory card (in this case
the old program is retained in the control relay).
•the selected retention of a marker, function relay or the text display is
switched off in the System menu SYSTEM, RETENTION... of the control
relay.
•the program is deleted in the main menu of the control relay via
PROGRAM..., DELETE PROG.
•the marker range M1 to M16 is cleared of its retentive actual values with
the master reset function relay activated in mode Z2 or Z3.
The operating hours counters are always retentive. The actual values can
only be reset by means of a special reset operation from the circuit diagram.
The retentive actual values are retained if:
•a new program with an activated retentive range is loaded from easySoft
or the memory card to the control relay.
•the program in the control relay is deleted via easySoft.
5.9.4 Transferring retentive behavior
The setting for retentive behavior is a circuit diagram setting; in other words,
the retention setting is on the memory and is transferred with the circuit
diagram when uploading or downloading from the PC.
5.9.5 Changing the operating mode or the circuit diagram
When the operating mode is changed or the easy circuit diagram is modified,
the retentive data is normally saved together with their actual values. The
actual values of no longer used relays are not retained.
M 9 - M12 åÆ
M13 - M16
N 9 - N16
C 5 - C 7 åæ
C 8 å
C13 - C16
D 1 - D 8
T 7 å
T 8 å
T13 - T16
5 settings
5.9 Retention (non-volatile data storage)
184 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
5.9.5.1 Changing the operating mode
If you change from RUN to STOP and then back to RUN, the actual values of
the retentive data will be retained.
5.9.5.2 Modifying the circuit diagram
If a modification is made to the easy circuit diagram, the actual values will be
retained.
5.9.6 Changing the startup behavior in the SYSTEM menu
The retentive actual values in easy will be retained irrespective of the RUN
MODE or STOP MODE settings.
CAUTION
Even if the markers and function relays that were retentive are
deleted from the circuit diagram, the retentive actual values
remain when changing from STOP to RUN, and when switching
the device off and on. Should these relays be used again in the
circuit diagram, they will still have their former actual values.
5 settings
5.10 Displaying device information
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 185
5.10 Displaying device information
Device information is provided for service tasks and for determining the
capability of the device concerned.
This function is only available with easy devices featuring a display.
Exception:
•Terminal mode with MFD-CP4 (see AWB2528-1548).
•MFD-CP8-… (see AWB2528-1480).
Easy allows you to show the following device information:
•AC, AB (AC voltage) or DA, DC (DC voltage),
•T (transistor output) or R (relay output)
•C (clock provided)
•LCD (display provided)
•OS: 1.10.204 (operating system version)
•CRC: 25825 (Checksum of the operating system is only displayed in
STOP mode).
•Program name if this was assigned in easySoft.
▶Switch to the main menu.
▶Select the main menu.
▶Select the INFO.. menu with the cursor button Ú.
▶Press the OK button.
This will display all device information.
Press ESC to exit the display.
￫The device information is always available. The password does
not prevent access.
PROGRAM... Æ
STOP å RUN
PARAMETERS..
INFO... æ
SET CLOCK..
DC TC LCD
OS: 1.00.027
CRC: 02752
PROGRAM_0815
5 settings
5.10 Displaying device information
186 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6 Internal
6.1 circuit diagram cycle
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 187
6 Internal
6.1 circuit diagram cycle
In conventional control systems, a relay or contactor control processes all the
rungs in parallel. The speed with which a contactor switches in this case
depends on the components used, and ranges from 15 to 40 ms for relay
pick-up and drop-out.
With easy the circuit diagram is processed with a microprocessor that
simulates the contacts and relays of the circuit concerned and thus
processes all switching operations considerably faster. Depending on its
size, the easy circuit diagram is processed cyclically every 2 to 40 ms.
During this time, easy passes through five segments in succession.
6.1.0.1 How evaluates the circuit diagram:
In the first three segments easy evaluates the contact fields in
succession.As it does so, easy also checks whether the contacts are
connected in parallel or series and stores the switching states of all the
contact fields.
In the fourth segment, easy assigns the new switching states to all the coils
in one pass.
The fifth segment is outside the circuit diagram and easy uses it to establish
contact to the “outside world”: The output relays Q1 to Q… are switched
and inputs I1 to I… are read again. easy also copies all the new switching
states to the status image register.
easy only uses this status image for one cycle. This ensures that each rung is
evaluated with the same switching states for one cycle, even if the input
signals at I1 to I12, for example, change their status several times within a
cycle.
Rung Segment
123 4 5
1
2
3
4
……
I1-Q1-j--ÄQ8
I1-I4-Ö1-TT2
I2-I3----RT2
T2-u-----ÄQ1
P1-k
6 Internal
6.1 circuit diagram cycle
188 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.1.0.2 Evaluation in the circuit diagram and high-speed counter functions
When using high-speed counter functions, the signal state is continuously
counted or measured irrespective of the processing of the circuit diagram.
(C13, C14 high-speed up/down counters, C15, C16 frequency counters)
6.1.1 operation and effects on circuit diagram creation
easy evaluates the circuit diagram in these five segments in succession. You
should therefore remember two points when you create your circuit
diagrams:
•The changeover of a relay coil does not change the switching state of an
associated contact until the next cycle starts.
•Always wire forwards, upwards or downwards. Never wire backwards.
6.1.1.1 Example: switching in the next cycle
Start condition:
•I1, I2 switched on
•Q1 switched off.
This is the circuit diagram of a self-latching circuit. If I1 and I2 are closed, the
switching state of relay coil ÄQ1 is latched via contact Q1.
•1st cycle: Inputs I1 and I2 are switched on. Coil ÄQ1 picks up.
•Contact Q1 remains switched off since easy evaluates from left to right.
•2nd cycle: The self-latching function now becomes active. easy has
transferred the coil states to contact Q1 at the end of the first cycle.
6.1.1.2 Example: Do not wire backwards
The following example shows why you should not wire backwards.
In the third rung, easy finds a connection to the second rung in which the
first contact field is empty. The output relay is not switched.
When wiring more than three contacts in series, use one of the marker
relays.
I1uI2----ÄQ1
Q1k
I1-Q4-I3o
z-----k
hI2-I4-ÄQ2
I1-Q4-I3-ÄM1
I2-I4-M1-ÄQ2
6 Internal
6.2 Delay times for inputs and outputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 189
6.2 Delay times for inputs and outputs
The time from reading the inputs and outputs to switching contacts in the
circuit diagram can be set in easy via the delay time.
This function is useful, for example, in order to ensure a clean switching
signal despite contact bounce.
Figure 91: easy input assigned with a switch
easy-DC, easy-DA, easy-AB and easy-AC units function with different input
voltages and therefore also have different evaluation characteristics and
delay times.
6.2.1 Delay times with -DA and -DC basic units
The delay time for DC signals is 20 ms.
Figure 92: Delay times of easy-DC and easy-DA basic units
An input signal S1 must therefore be 15 V or 8 V (easy-DA) for at least 20 ms
on the input terminal before the switch contact will change from "0" to "1"
(range A). If applicable, this time must also include the cycle time (range B)
since easy does not detect the signal until the start of a cycle.
The same time delay (range C) applies when the signal drops out from 1 to 0.
If the debounce is switched off, easy responds to an input signal after just
0.25 ms.
S1
0V I1
AC
1
0
1
0
S1
BBBBB
I1
6 Internal
6.2 Delay times for inputs and outputs
190 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Figure 93: Switching behavior with input debounce disabled
Typical delay times with the debounce delay switched off are:
•On delay for I1 to I12
•0.25 ms (DC),
•0.3 ms (easy-DA)
•Off delay for
•I1 to I6 and I9 to I12: 0.4 ms (easy-DC), 0.3 ms (easy-DA)
•I7 and I8: 0.2 ms (DC), 0.35 ms (easy-DA)
6.2.2 Delay time with -AB, -AC basic units
The input delay with AC voltage signals depends on the frequency. The
appropriate values for 60 Hz are given in brackets:
•Switch-on delay
•80 ms at 50 Hz,
•66 ms at 60 Hz
•Off delay for
•I1 to I6 and I9 to I12: 80 ms (66 ms)
•I7 and I8: 160 ms (150 ms) with easy-AB
•I7 and I8: 80 ms (66 ms) with easy-AC
Figure 94: On delay for easy-AC, easy-AB
￫Ensure clean input signals when the debounce is deactivated as
easy reacts even to very short signals.
1
0
1
0
S1
BBBBBB
AC
I1
A
11
B
S1
tSC2
6 Internal
6.2 Delay times for inputs and outputs
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 191
If the debounce is switched on, easy checks at 40 ms (33 ms) intervals
whether there is a half-wave present at an input terminal (1st and 2nd pulses
in A). If easy detects two pulses in succession, the device switches on the
corresponding input internally.
If this is not the case, the input is switched off again as soon as easy does
not detect two successive half-waves (1st and 2nd pulses in B).
Figure 95: Pushbutton with bounce
If a button or switch bounces (A), the delay time may be extended by 40 ms
(33 ms) (A).
If the debounce delay is switched off, the delay time is reduced:
•On delay
20 ms (16.6 ms)
•Off delay for
I1 to I6 and I9 to I12: 20 ms (16.6 ms)
•Off delay for
I7 and I8: 100 ms (100 ms) with easy-AB, easy-AC
Figure 96: On and off delays
easy switches the contact as soon as it detects a pulse (A). If no pulse is
detected, easy switches off the contact (B).
6.2.3 Delay times for the analog inputs of -AB, -DA and -DC
The analog input values are read at 1 ms intervals. The values are
continuously smoothed so that the analog values do not fluctuate
excessively and remain clean. At the start of the circuit diagram cycle, the
currently available analog values that have been smoothed are provided for
processing in the circuit diagram.
￫The procedure for changing the delay times is described in on
(￫section “5.5 Activating input delay (debounce)”, page 176).
11 21
S1
AB
A
1221
B
S1
tSC1
6 Internal
6.3 Monitoring of the functionality of the basic unit
192 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.3 Monitoring of the functionality of the basic unit
easy continuously checks its functionality by means of a system test and by
means of various timeout watchdogs.
Table 34: Times of the timeout watchdogs
6.4 Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with EASY..-D.-T..
Depending on the type of easy in use, it is possible to use the internal inputs
I15 and I16, R15, R16 to monitor for short-circuits or overloads on an output.
•EASY512-…-T…:
I16 = Group fault alarm for outputs Q1 to Q4.
•EASY721.-..-T..:
•I16 = Group fault alarm for outputs Q1 to Q4.
•I15 = Group fault signal for outputs Q5 to Q8.
•EASY620-D.-TE:
•R16 = Group fault alarm for outputs S1 to S4.
•R15 = Group fault signal for outputs S5 to S8.
Table 35: Status of error outputs
The following examples are for I16 = Q1 to Q4. I15 indicates in the same
way short-circuits and overloads on Q5 to Q8.
6.4.0.1 Example 1: Output with fault indication
The circuit diagram functions as follows:
If a transistor output indicates a fault, M16 is set by I16. The N/C contact of
M16 switches off the output Q1. M16 can be cleared by resetting the easy
supply voltage.
6.4.0.2 Example 2: Output of operating state
The circuit functions as described in Example 1. An additional feature is that
when an overload is detected, the indicator light at Q4 is actuated. If Q4 has
an overload, it would 'pulse'.
Timeout Watchdog for monitoring Specified Response time [s]
Program processing 1
Program Download 1
Communication via the serial multi-function interface 3
State of outputs Status I15 or I16, R15 or R16
No fault present 0 = switched off (N/O contact)
Fault present on at least one output 1 = Switched on (N/O contact)
I1-M16---ÄQ1
I16------SM16
I1-M16---ÄQ1
I16------SM16
M16------ÄQ4
6 Internal
6.5 700 expanding
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 193
6.4.0.3 Example 3: Automatic reset of error signal
The circuit diagram functions in the same way as Example 2. In addition the
marker M16 is reset every 60 seconds by timing relay T8 (on-delayed, 60 s).
Should I16 remain at 1, M16 will continue to be set. Q1 is set briefly to 1 until
I16 switches off again.
6.5 700 expanding
You can expand easy700 with EASY410-DC-.E, EASY618-..-RE, EASY202-RE
or EASY620-D.-TE modules locally or use the EASY200-EASY coupling
module for remote expansion.
For this first install the units and connect the inputs and outputs
(￫Chapter 2 "Installation“, page 25).
You process the inputs of the expansion devices as contacts in the easy
circuit diagram in the same way as you process the inputs of the basic unit.
The input contacts are assigned the operand identifiers R1 to R12.
R15 and R16 are the group fault alarms of the transistor expansion unit
(￫Section "6.4 Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with EASY..-D.-T..“,
page 192).
The outputs are processed as relay coils or contacts in the same way as
outputs in the basic unit. The output relays are called S1 to S8.
The following bus modules can also be connected:
•EASY205-ASI (AS-Interface),
•EASY204-DP (Profibus DP),
•EASY221-CO (CAN open) or
•EASY222-DN (Device NET).
These modules offer considerably more functions than simple I/O expansion
modules. Depending on type, all the data of the program can be read and
setpoints can be written. The functions of the individual devices are
described in the relevant documentation.
6.5.1 How is an expansion unit recognized?
easy checks cyclically whether a device is sending data via the easyLink
interface.
I1-M16---ÄQ1
I16------SM16
M16-------TT8
T8-------RM16
M16-------ÄQ4
￫EASY410-DC-.E
provides the outputs S1 to S4. The other outputs
S5 - S8 can be used as markers. EASY618-..-RE provides the
outputs S1 to S6. The other outputs S7, S8 can be used as
markers.
6 Internal
6.5 700 expanding
194 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.5.2 Transfer behavior
The input and output data of the expansion units is transferred serially in both
directions. Take into account the modified reaction times of the inputs and
outputs of the expansion units:
6.5.2.1 Input and output reaction times of expansion units
The debounce setting has no effect on the expansion unit.
Transfer times for input and output signals:
•Central expansion
•Time for inputs R1 to R12: 30 ms + 1 cycle time
•Time for outputs S1 to S6 (S8): 15 ms + 1 cycle
•Remote expansion
•Time for inputs R1 to R12: 80 ms + 1 cycle time
•Time for outputs S1 to S6 (S8): 40 ms + 1 cycle
6.5.3 Function monitoring of expansion units
If the power supply of the expansion unit is not present, no connection can
be established between it and basic unit. The expansion inputs R1 to R12,
R15, R16 are incorrectly processed in the basic unit and show status 0. It
cannot be assured that the outputs S1 to S8 are transferred to the expansion
unit.
The state of internal input I14 of the basic unit indicates the state of the
expansion device:
•I14 = “0”: expansion unit is functional
•I14 = “1”: expansion unit is not functional
DANGER
Ensure the continuous monitoring of easy expansion devices
in order to prevent switching faults in machines or systems.
￫When the power supply is switched on, basic units and
expansion devices may require different power up times to
reach full functionality. If the basic device is powered up faster,
the internal monitoring input I14 will have status I14 = "1“,
indicating that an expansion device is not functional.
6 Internal
6.6 Saving and loading circuit diagrams
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 195
Example
The expansion unit may be powered up later than the basic unit. This means
that the basic unit is switched to RUN when an expansion unit is missing.
The following easy circuit diagram detects if the expansion unit is functional
or not functional.
As long as I14 is 1, the remaining circuit diagram is skipped. If I14 is 0, the
circuit diagram is processed. If the expansion unit drops out for any reason,
the circuit diagram is skipped. M1 detects whether the circuit diagram was
processed for at least one cycle after the power supply is switched on. If the
circuit diagram is skipped, all the outputs retain their previous state. The next
example should be used if this is not desired.
Example with LCD output and reset of the outputs
6.6 Saving and loading circuit diagrams
You can transfer circuit diagrams via the serial multi-function interface to a
memory card or to a PC with the easySoft programming software and a
programming cable.
6.6.1 EASY…-..-..X
Models without buttons can be loaded with the program via easySoft or
automatically from the fitted memory card every time the power supply is
switched on.
I14-M1----Ä:8
----------SM1
I14--------Ä:8
I1uI2-----ÄQ1
Q1k
:8
I14-M1----Ä:1
----------SM1
I14--------Ä:1
I2uI3-----ÄQ1
Q1k
------------Ä:8
:1-------uÄD1
hRQ1
:8
6 Internal
6.6 Saving and loading circuit diagrams
196 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.6.2 Interface
The serial multi-function interface is covered.
Figure 97: Do not touch the interface
▶Carefully remove the interface cover with a screwdriver.
Figure 98: Remove interface cover
▶Push the interface cover back onto the shaft after you have removed the
programming cable.
DANGER
On easy AC devices there is a danger of electric shock if:
•L phase conductor and N neutral conductor are reversed,
•the 230 V/115 V supply voltage is present on the multi-
function interface,
•if the plug is not properly connected or conductive objects
are inserted in the shaft of the multi-function interface.
For your safety:
•Use the original programming cable, which ensures safe
electrical isolation of the PC terminal from the connection
voltage of the L phase conductor (100 to 240 V AC).
•Push the interface cover back onto the shaft when the
interface is no longer required.
6 Internal
6.7 Memory card
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 197
6.7 Memory card
The card is available as an accessory EASY-M32K for easy500 and easy700.
6.7.1 Compatibility with EASY-M-8K, EASY-M-16K memory cards
Circuit diagrams with all the data can transferred to the easy500 and easy700
from the EASY-M-8K (easy412) and EASY-M16K (easy600) memory card. A
transfer, however, in the other direction is not possible.
Each memory card can hold one easy circuit diagram.
Information stored on the memory card is “non-volatile” and thus you can
use the card to archive, transfer and copy circuit diagrams.
On the memory card you can save:
•the circuit diagram
•all parameter sets of the function relays
•all display texts with functions
•the system settings,
•Input delay
•P Buttons
•Password
•retention on/off,
•Card Start
•summer time start/end time settings
▶Insert the memory card in the open interface slot.
Figure 99: Inserting the memory card
easy500 (EASY-M-32K): easy700 (EASY-M-32K):
￫With easy you can insert and remove the memory card even if
the power feed is switched on, without the risk of losing data.
2
1
1
2
6 Internal
6.7 Memory card
198 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.7.2 Loading or saving circuit diagrams
You can only transfer circuit diagrams in STOP mode.
6.7.2.1 Behaviour of device without integrated keypad, display when loading the memory
card
If a memory card is inserted in easy variants without an on-board keypad and
LCD, the circuit diagram is automatically transferred from the memory card
to the EASY…-…-…X when the power supply is switched on. If the memory
card contains an invalid circuit diagram, the circuit diagram installed in the
easy is retained.
6.7.2.2 Behavior of the devices with button field, display with memory card fitted
If easy does not contain a circuit diagram, this is automatically loaded from
the memory card when the easy is switched on.
▶Switch to STOP mode.
▶Select PROGRAM… from the main menu.
▶Select the CARD… menu option.
The CARD… menu option will only appear if you have inserted a functional
memory card.
You can transfer a circuit diagram from easy to the card and from the card to
the easy memory or delete the content of the card.
After transmission, remove the memory card and close the cover.
￫The memory card is detected when the card is inserted and you
move from the main menu to the program menu.
As read access to EASY-M-8K, EASY-M-16K and EASY-M-32K
cards is possible, the card can only be removed in the Status
display. This ensures that the correct card is always detected.
Only the EASY-M-32K memory card can be written to.
PROGRAM
DELETE PROG
CARD…
DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD
￫If the operating voltage fails during communication with the
card, repeat the last step since easy may not have transferred or
deleted all the data.
6 Internal
6.7 Memory card
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 199
6.7.2.3 Saving a circuit diagram to the card
▶Select DEVICE-CARD.
▶Confirm the prompt with OK to delete the contents of the memory card
and replace it with the easy circuit diagram.
Press ESC to cancel.
6.7.2.4 Loading a circuit diagram from the card
▶Select the CARD → DEVICE menu option.
▶Press OK to confirm the prompt if you want to delete the easy memory
and replace it with the card content.
Press ESC to go back one menu.
6.7.2.5 Deleting a circuit diagram on the card
▶Select the DELETE CARD menu option.
▶Press OK to confirm the prompt and to delete the card content.
Press ESC to cancel.
REPLACE ?
DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD
CAUTION
Once you have started the CARD → DEVICE transfer, the
following operation is initiated:
•The RAM of the device is loaded from the card.
•The internal program memory is cleared.
•The data is written from the card to the internal retentive
program memory.
This is carried out in blocks. A complete program is not
transferred to the RAM for space reasons.
If an invalid program or an interruption occurs during the read or
write operation, easy500 or easy700 loses the program in the
internal memory.
DELETE ?
6 Internal
6.8 Soft
200 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.8 Soft
easySoft-Basic and easySoft-Pro are PC programs for creating, testing and
managing easy circuit diagrams.
6.8.1 Program transfer between Soft and 500/700
Figure 100: Plug in programming cable
▶Connect the programming cable to the serial PC interface.
▶Fit the easy plug into the opened multi-function interface.
▶Activate the Status display on the easy.
The easySoft-Basic or
easySoft-Pro programming software allows you to transfer circuit diagrams
from the PC to the easy device or vice versa. You can also switch the device
to RUN mode from easySoft in order to test the program in the actual wiring.
￫To transfer data between the PC and easy500/700 devices, only
use the original programming cable supplied as an accessory:
•EASY-PC-CAB or
•EASY-USB-CAB
DANGER
There is a danger of electric shock on easy AC devices if the L
phase conductor and N neutral conductor are reversed.
For your safety:
•Use of this original programming cable ensures that the PC
terminal is electrically isolated from the connection voltage
of the L phase conductor (100 to 240 V AC) if the phase
conductor and neutral conductor are reversed. The original
programming cables are optocoupled.
￫easy cannot exchange data with the PC while the circuit
diagram display is on screen.
6 Internal
6.8 Soft
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 201
If there are transmission problems, easy will display the INVALID PROG
message.
▶Check whether the circuit diagram is suitable for the destination device.
Figure 101: Removing the EASY-PC-CAB
▶After transmission, remove the cable and close the interface.
6.8.2 Soft help
easySoft is provided with an extensive Online Help.
▶Start easySoft-Basic or easySoft-Pro and click the ? menu item in order to
open the Help.
The help provides all the additional information about easySoft that you will
need.
INVALID PROG
￫If the operating voltage fails during communication with the PC,
repeat the last step. It is possible that not all the data was
transferred between the PC and easy.
6 Internal
6.9 with a remote display and operator unit
202 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
6.9 with a remote display and operator unit
easy500/700 devices can be operated with a remote display and operator
unit. In this configuration, all the display information is transferred via the
serial multi-function interface.
This has the advantage that easy can be operated remotely. The texts in easy
are backlit and displayed on the front of the operator or control panel in twice
the size. The display/operating unit provides protection to IP65.
If a display/operating unit with a keypad is used, easy can be programmed
and assigned parameters from “outside”.
The MFD-80 (IP65 display unit), MFD-80-B (IP65 display/operating unit) with
the MFD-CP4-500 power supply/communication unit are currently available
for use as stand-alone display/operating units.
6.10 Device version
Every easy has the device version number printed on the left of the device
housing. The device version is indicated by the first two digits of the device
number.
Figure 102: Example of device version
This device is of device version 01.
The device version provides useful service information about the hardware
version and the version of the operating system. The device version is
important for selecting the correct control relay for EASY-SOFT-BASIC.
￫Card mode operation is not possible when using a stand-alone
display/operating unit. The interface can only be used once.
￫The MFD-CP4 communication unit establishes permanent
communication with the easy control relay. This increases
easy's cycle time, and must be taken into account during
engineering.
DC 20.4 …28.8 V
3 W
01-900000042
7 What Happens If …?
7.1 Messages from the system
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 203
7 What Happens If …?
You may sometimes find that easy does not do exactly what you expect. If
this happens, read through the following notes which are intended to help
you solve some of the problems you may encounter.
You can use the power flow display in easy to check the logic operations in
the easy circuit diagram with reference to the switching states of contacts
and relays.
Only qualified persons should test easy voltages while the device is in
operation.
7.1 Messages from the system
easy system messages
on the LCD
Explanation Remedy
No display Power supply interrupted Switch on the power supply
easy LCD faulty Replace easy
Continuous display
TEST: AC Self-test aborted Replace easy
TEST: EEPROM
TEST: DISPLAY
TEST: CLOCK
ERROR: I2C Memory card removed or not inserted correctly
before saving
Inserting the memory card
Memory card faulty Replace memory card
easy is faulty Replace easy
ERROR: EEPROM The memory for storing the retentive values or
the easy circuit diagram memory is faulty.
Replace easy
ERROR: CLOCK Clock error Replace easy
ERROR: LCD LCD is faulty Replace easy
ERROR: ACLOW Incorrect AC voltage Test the voltage
easy is faulty Replace easy
7 What Happens If …?
7.2 Possible situations when creating circuit diagrams
204 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
7.2 Possible situations when creating circuit diagrams
Possible situations
when creating circuit
diagrams
Explanation Remedy
Cannot enter contact or
relay in circuit diagram
easy is in RUN mode Select STOP mode
Time switch switches at
wrong times
Time or time switch parameters not correct Check time and parameters
Message when using a
memory card PROG
INVALID
easy memory card contains no circuit diagram Change the version of easy or
change the circuit diagram on the
memory card
Circuit diagram on the memory card uses
contacts/relays that easy does not recognize
Power flow display does
not show changes to the
rungs
easy is in STOP mode Select RUN mode
Association/connection not fulfilled Check and modify circuit diagram
and parameter sets
Relay does not activate coil
Incorrect parameter values/time
• Analog value comparison is incorrect
• Time value of timing relay is incorrect
• Function of timing relay is incorrect
Relay Q or M does not
pick up
Relay coil has been wired up several times Check coil field entries
Input not detected Loose terminal contact Check installation instructions,
check external wiring
No voltage to switch/button
Wire breakage
easy input is faulty Replace easy
Relay output Q does not
switch and activate the
load
easy in STOP mode Select RUN mode
No voltage at relay contact Check installation instructions,
check external wiring
easy power supply interrupted
easy circuit diagram does not activate relay
output
Wire breakage
easy relay is faulty Replace easy
7 What Happens If …?
7.3 Event
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 205
7.3 Event
Event Explanation Remedy
The actual values are not
being stored retentively.
Retention has not been switched on. Switch on retention in the
SYSTEM menu.
The RETENTION… menu
is not displayed in the
SYSTEM menu.
easy is in RUN mode Select STOP mode
The SYSTEM menu is not
displayed.
This easy model does not have this menu. Exchange easy if you need
retention
easy starts only in
operating mode STOP
No circuit diagram in easy Load, input circuit diagram
Startup behavior is set to the function "Startup
in operating mode STOP".
Set the startup behavior in the
SYSTEM menu.
LCD display showing
nothing.
No power supply Switch on the power supply
easy is faulty Press the OK button. If no menu
appears, replace the easy.
Text displayed with too many spaces Enter text or do not select
GW flashes on the Status
display
EASY200-EASY bus coupler detected without I/
O expansion
Connect I/O expansion to
external easyLink
7 What Happens If …?
7.3 Event
206 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8 Appendix
8.1 Approval and Certification
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 207
8 Appendix
8.1 Approval and Certification
easy500/700 devices are approved for several countries and regions as well
as for shipboard use. The same applies to expansion devices.
8.1.1 Approvals and national approvals for 500/700 devices
MFD-Titan devices are approved for Russia, in accordance with GOST-R and
for the Ukraine in accordance with Ukrain-GOST.
8.1.2 Shipping approvals for 500/700 devices
Product standards •IEC/EN ￫section “8.3.1 Standards”, page 210;
• 508 (INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT);
• CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 (Process Control Equipment);
• CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 (Non-Incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I,
Division 2 Hazardous Locations)
•CE-mark
• C-TICK Label
File no. E135462
CCN NRAQ
CSA File No. 012528
CSA Class No. 2252-01 + 2258-02 (for Hazardous Locations)
NA Certification Listed, CSA certified
C-TICK Label No. N4246
Protection type IEC: IP20; /CSA Type : -
easy500/700 BV
(Bureau Veritas)
DNV
(DET NORSKE
VERITAS)
GL
(Germanischer
Lloyd)
LR
(Lloyds Register
of Shipping)
Certificate
number:
21606/A0 BV A-11768 32920-06 HH 06/20051
8 Appendix
8.2 Dimensions
208 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.1.3 Approvals and national approvals for expansion devices
Expansion devices are also approved for Russia, in accordance with GOST-R
and for the Ukraine in accordance with Ukrain-GOST.
8.1.4 Shipping approvals for expansion units 6..
8.2 Dimensions
Figure 103: Dimensions of easy200 in mm (for dimensions in inches see table 36, page 209)
Product standards •IEC/EN ￫section “8.3.1 Standards”, page 210;
• 508 (INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT);
• CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 (Process Control Equipment);
• CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 (Non-Incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class
I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations)
•CE-mark
File no. E135462
CCN NRAQ, NRAQ7
CSA File No. 012528
CSA Class No. 2252-01 + 2258-02 (for Hazardous Locations)
NA Certification Listed, CSA certified
Protection type I/O
modules
IEC: IP20; /CSA Type : -
easy6.. BV
(Bureau Veritas)
DNV
(DET NORSKE
VERITAS)
GL
(Germanischer
Lloyd)
LR
(Lloyds Register of
Shipping)
Certificate
number:
- - 42991- 02 HH
easy6..
02/20029
EASY618-..-RE
M4
7.5
35.5
7.5
90
102
110
47.5
56.5
58
45
4.5
8 Appendix
8.2 Dimensions
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 209
Figure 104: Dimensions of easy512-… in mm (for dimensions in inches see table 36)
Figure 105: Dimensions of easy600, easy700 in mm (for dimensions in inches see table 36)
Table 36: Dimensions in inches
mm inches mm inches
4.5 0.177 56.5 2.22
7.5 0.295 58 2.28
10.75 4.23 71.5 2.81
16.25 0.64 75 2.95
35.5 1.4 90 3.54
35.75 1.41 102 4.01
45 1.77 107.5 4.23
47.5 1.87 110 4.33
50 1.97
10.75 50
M4
35.75
71.5
90
102
110
47.5
56.5
58
45
4.5
90
102
110
M4
107.5
75 16.2516.25
47.5
56.5
58
45
4.5
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
210 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3 Technical data
8.3.1 Standards
8.3.2 General
easy500/700
Standards EN 55011, EN 55022, IEC EN 61000-4, IEC60068-2-6,
IEC60068-2-27
easy200 easy512 easy600, easy700
Dimensions W x H x D
[mm] 35.5 x 90 x 56.5 71.5 x 90 x 56.5 107.5 x 90 x 56.5
[inches] 1.4 x 3.54 x 2.08 2.81 x 3.54 x 2.08 4.23 x 3.54 x 2.08
Space units (SU) width 2 SU (space units) wide 4 SU (space units) wide 6 space units wide
Weight
[g] 70 200 300
[lb] 0.154 0.441 0.661
Mounting DIN 50022, 35 mm rail or screw mounting with 3 ZB4-GF1 fixing brackets
(accessories); with easy200 only 2 fixing brackets required.
Climatic environmental conditions
(Cold to IEC 60068-2-1, Heat to IEC 60068-2-2)
Operating ambient temperature
Installed horizontally/vertically
–25 to 55 °C, –13 to 131 °F
Condensation Prevent condensation with suitable
measures
LCD display (reliably legible) 0 - 55 °C, 32 to 131 °F
Storage/transport temperature –40 to +70 °C, –40 to 158 °F
Relative humidity (IEC 60068-2-30) 5 to 95 %, non-condensing
Air pressure (in operation) 795 - 1080 hPa
Corrosion resistance
IEC 60068-2-42 SO2 10 cm3/m3, 4 days
IEC 60068-2-43 H2S1 cm
3/m3, 4 days
Inflammability class to UL 94 V 0
Ambient mechanical conditions
Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection (EN 50178, IEC 60529, VBG4) IP20
Vibration (IEC 60068-2-6) 10 - 57 Hz (Constant amplitude 0.15 mm)
57 - 150 Hz (constant acceleration 2 g)
Shock (IEC 60068-2-27) 18 shocks (semi-sinusoidal 15 g/11 ms)
Drop (IEC 60068-2-31) Drop height 50 mm
Free fall, when packed (IEC 60068-2-32) 1 m
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 211
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), (IEC/EN 61 000-4-2, severity level 3) 8 kV air discharge,
6 kV contact discharge
Electromagnetic fields (RFI), (IEC/EN 61000-4-3) Field strength 10 V/m
Emitted interference Interference immunity (EN 55011, EN 55022)
IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4
Class B
Fast transient burst (IEC/EN 61000-4-4, severity level 3) 2 kV power cables,
2 kV signal cables
High-energy pulses (surge) easy-AC , (IEC/EN 61000-4-5) 2 kV power cable symmetrical
Surge easy-DA, easy-DC, easy-AB
(IEC/EN 61000-4-5, severity level 2)
0.5 kV power cable symmetrical
Immunity to line-conducted interference to (IEC/EN 61000-4-6) 10 V
Insulation resistance
Clearance in air and creepage distances EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2, No 142
Insulation resistance EN 50178
Overvoltage category/degree of pollution II/2
Tools and cable cross-sections
solid ≧ 0.2 mm2, ≦ 4 mm2/AWG: 22 – 12
flexible with ferrule ≧ 0.2 mm2, ≦ 2.5 mm2/
AWG: 22 – 12
Factory wiring: to AWG 30
Slot-head screwdriver, width 3.5 x 0.8 mm
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm
Backup/accuracy of real-time clock (only with easy-C)
Back-up of the clock
① = backup time in hours
② = service life in years
Accuracy of the real-time clock Normally ± 5 s/day, ~ 0.5 h/year
Repetition accuracy of timing relays
Accuracy of timing relays ± 1 % of value
Resolution
Range “s” 10 ms
Range “M:S” 1 s
Range “H:M” 1 min.
Retentive memory
Write cycles of the retentive memory (minimum) 1000000
Rungs (basic units)
EASY512, easy700 128
a
b
180
200
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
00246810 2012 1413 5 7 9 1113
55°C
25°C
15 17 1916 18
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
212 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3.3 Power supply
8.3.3.1 EASY512-AC-…, EASY719-AC-…, EASY512-AB-…, EASY719-AB-…
8.3.3.2 EASY512-DA-…, EASY719-DA-..., EASY512-DC-…, EASY719-DC-…, EASY721-DC-…
EASY512-AB-…, EASY719-AB-… EASY512-AC-…, EASY719-AC-…
Rated value (sinusoidal) 24 V AC 100/110/115/120/230/240 V AC
Operating range +10/–15 %
20.4 - 26.4 V AC
+10/–15 %
85 - 264 V AC
Frequency, rated value,
tolerance
50/60 Hz, 6 5 % 50/60 Hz, 65 %
Input current consumption EASY512-AB-... EASY719-AB-... EASY512-AB-... EASY719-AB-...
At 115/120 V AC 60 Hz Normally 40 mA Normally 70 mA
at 230/240 V AC 50 Hz Normally 20 mA Normally 35 mA
At 24 V AC 50/60 Hz Normally 200 mA Normally 300 mA
Voltage dips 20 ms, IEC/EN 61131-2 20 ms, IEC/EN 61131-2
Heat dissipation EASY512-AB-... EASY719-AB-... EASY512-AC-... EASY719-AC-...
At 115/120 V AC Normally 5 VA Normally 10 VA
at 230/240 V AC Normally 5 VA Normally 10 VA
At 24 V AC Normally 5 VA Normally 7 VA
Potential isolation
from the inputs No No
from the outputs Yes Yes
for analog inputs No -
for Multi-function interface No No
to EASY-Link No No
EASY512-DA-…, EASY719-DA-… EASY512-DC-…, EASY719-DC-…,
EASY721-DC-…
Rated voltage
Nominal value 12 V DC,
+30%, –15%
24 V DC, +20 %, –15 %
Permissible range 10.2 - 15.6 V DC 20.4 - 28.8
Ripple ≤ 5 % ≤ 5 %
Input current at rated voltage EASY512-DA-... EASY719-DA-... EASY512-DC-... EASY7..-DC-...
Normally 140 mA Normally 200 mA Normally 80 mA Normally 140 mA
Voltage dips 10 ms, IEC/EN 61 131-2 10 ms, IEC/EN 61 131-2
Heat dissipation EASY512-DA-... EASY719-DA-... EASY512-DC-... EASY7..-DC-...
Normally 2 W Normally 3.5 W Normally 2 W Normally 3.5 W
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 213
8.3.4 Digital inputs
8.3.4.1 EASY-512-AB-…, EASY719-AB-…
EASY-512-AB-… EASY719-AB-...
Digital inputs 24 V AC
Number 812
Status display LCD (if provided) LCD (if provided)
2 inputs (I7, I8) usable as analog inputs 4 inputs (I7, I8, I11, I12) usable as
analog inputs
Potential isolation
From power supply No No
between digital inputs No No
from the outputs Yes Yes
Rated voltage L
(sinusoidal)
24 V AC 24 V AC
At signal “0” 0 to 6 V AC 0 to 6 V AC
At signal ”1” (I7, I8)
> 8 V AC, > 11 V DC
(I1 - I6) 14 - 26.4 V AC
(I7, I8, I11, I12)
> 8 V AC, > 11 V DC
(I1 - I6, I9, I10) 14 - 26.4 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Input current with "1" signal
I1 to I6
(EASY719.. also I9 to I10)
4 mA at 24 V AC 50 Hz0 4 mA at 24 V AC, 50 Hz
Input current on signal 1
I7, I8,
(EASY719.. also I11, I12)
2 mA at 24 V AC 50 Hz,
2 mA at 24 V DC
2 mA at 24 V AC 50 Hz,
2 mA at 24 V DC
Delay time for 0 to 1 and 1 to 0 for I1 to I8, EASY719… also I9 to I12
Debounce ON 80 ms (50 Hz), 66²/3 ms (60 Hz) 80 ms (50 Hz), 66²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Debounce OFF 20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz) 20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Max. permissible cable length (per input)
I1 to I8,
(to EASY719… also I9 to
I10)
Normally 40 m Normally 40 m
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
214 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3.4.2 EASY-512-AC-…, EASY618-AC-.E, EASY719-AC-…
EASY-512-AC-… EASY618-AC-.E, EASY719-AC-...
Digital inputs 115/230 V AC
Number 812
Status display LCD (if provided) LCD (if provided)
Potential isolation
From power supply No No
between digital inputs No No
from the outputs Yes Yes
Rated voltage L (sinusoidal)
At signal “0” 0 - 40 V AC 0 - 40 V AC
At signal ”1” 79 - 264 V AC 79 - 264 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Input current with "1" signal
R1 to R12, I1 to I6
(EASY71. also I9 to I12)
6 x 0.5 mA at 230 V AC 50 Hz,
6 x 0.25 mA at 115 V AC 60 Hz
10 x (12) 0.5 mA at
230 V AC, 50 Hz
10 x (12) x 0.25 mA at
115 V AC, 60 Hz
Input current on signal 1
I7, I8
2 x 6 mA at 230 V AC 50 Hz,
2 x 4 mA at 115 V AC 60 Hz
2 x 6 mA at 230 V AC 50 Hz,
2 x 4 mA at 115 V AC 60 Hz
Delay time for 0 to 1 and 1 to 0 for I1 to I6, I9 to I12
Debounce ON 80 ms (50 Hz), 66²/3 ms (60 Hz) 80 ms (50 Hz), 66²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Debounce OFF
(also R1 to R12)
20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz) 20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Delay time I7, I8 for 1 to 0
Debounce ON 160 ms (50 Hz), 150 ms (60 Hz) 80 ms (50 Hz),66²/3ms (60 Hz)
Debounce OFF 100 ms (50 Hz/60 Hz) 20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Delay time I7, I8 for 0 to 1
Debounce ON 80 ms (50 Hz), 66²/3 ms (60 Hz) 80 ms (50 Hz), 66²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Debounce OFF 20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz) 20 ms (50 Hz), 16²/3 ms (60 Hz)
Max. permissible cable length (per input)
I1 to I6, R1 to R12
(at EASY719-.. also I9 to
I12)
Normally 40 m Normally 40 m
I7, I8 Normally 100 m Normally 100 m
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 215
8.3.4.3 EASY512-DA-…, EASY719-DA-...
EASY512-DA-… EASY719-DA-…
Digital inputs
Number 812
Inputs usable as analog
inputs
I7, I8 I7, I8, I11, I12
Status display LCD (if provided) LCD (if provided)
Potential isolation
from power supply No No
between digital inputs No No
from the outputs Yes Yes
Rated voltage
Nominal value 12 V DC 12 V DC
At signal “0” 4 V DC (I1 - I8) 4 V DC (I1 - I12,)
At signal ”1” 8 V DC (I1 - I8) 8 V DC (I1 - I12)
Input current on signal 1 3.3 mA at 12 V DC
(I1 - I6)
3.3 mA at 12 V DC
(I1 to I6, I9 - I10)
I7, I8, (I11, I12) 1.1 mA at 12 V DC 1.1 mA at 12 V DC
Delay time from 0 to 1
Debounce ON 20 ms 20 ms
Debounce OFF Normally 0.3 ms (I1 - I6)
Normally 0.35 ms (I7, I8)
Normally 0.3 ms (I1 - I6, I9, I10)
Normally 0.35 ms (I7, I8, I11, I12)
Delay time from 1 to 0
Debounce ON 20 ms 20 ms
Debounce OFF Normally 0.3 ms (I1 - I6)
Normally 0.15 ms (I7, I8)
type 0.4 ms
(I1 to I6, I9 - I10)
Normally 0.2 ms (I7, I8, I11, I12)
Cable length (unscreened) 100 m 100 m
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
216 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3.4.4 EASY512-DC-…, EASY6..-DC-.E, EASY7..-DC-...
EASY512-DC-… EASY6..-DC-.E EASY7..-DC-…
Digital inputs
Number 812 12
Inputs usable as analog inputs I7, I8 I7, I8, I11, I12
Status display LCD (if provided)
Potential isolation
To power supply No No No
between digital inputs No No No
from the outputs Yes Yes Yes
Rated voltage
Nominal value 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC
At signal “0” < 5 V DC (I1 to I8) < 5 V DC (R1 to R12) < 5 V DC (I1 to I12)
At signal ”1” > 8 V DC (I7, I8) > 8 V DC
(I7, I8, I11, I12)
> 15 V DC
(I1 - I6)
> 15 V DC (R1 - R12) > 15 V DC
(I1 - I6, I9, I10)
Input current on signal 1 3.3 mA at 24 V DC (I1 -
I6)
3.3 mA at 24 V DC (R1 -
R12)
3.3 mA at 24 V DC (I1 -
I6, I9, I10)
I7, I8 (easy7..-DC-.. also I11,
I12)
2.2 mA at 24 V DC 2.2 mA at 24 V DC
Delay time from 0 to 1
Debounce ON 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
Debounce OFF
easy512.DC-.. I1 to I8
easy6..-DC-.. R1 to R12
easy7.._DC-.. I1 to I12
Normally 0.25 ms
Delay time from 1 to 0
Debounce ON 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
Debounce OFF • Normally 0.4 ms
(I1 - I6)
• Normally 0.2 ms (I7,
I8)
Normally 0.4 ms
(R1 - R12)
• Normally 0.4 ms
(I1 - I6, I9, I10)
• Normally 0.2 ms
(I7, I8, I11, I12)
Cable length (unshielded) 100 m 100 m 100 m
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 217
8.3.5 Rapid counter inputs
8.3.6 Analog inputs
High-speed counter inputs, I1 to I4 EASY512-DA-…,
EASY512-DC-…,
EASY719-DA-…,
EASY719-DC-…,
EASY721-DC-…
Quantity 4
Cable length (shielded) m 20
High-speed up and down counter
Counter frequency kHz ≤1
Pulse shape Square
Pulse Pause Ratio 1:1
Frequency Counter
Counter frequency kHz ≤ 1
Pulse shape Square
Pulse Pause Ratio 1:1
EASY512-AB-…, EASY512-DA-…,
EASY512-DC-…
EASY719-AB-…, EASY719-DA-…,
EASY719-DC-…, EASY721-DC-…
Analog inputs I7, I8, I11, I12
Number 2 4
Potential isolation
from power supply No No
To the digital inputs No No
from the outputs Yes Yes
Input type DC voltage DC voltage
Signal range 0-10 V DC 0-10 V DC
Resolution, analog 10 mV 10 mV
Resolution, digital 0.01 (10 Bit, 1 - 1023) 0.01 (10 Bit, 0 - 1023)
Input impedance 11.2 kΩ11.2 kΩ
Accuracy
Two easy devices ± 3 % of actual value ± 3 % of actual value
Within a single device ± 2 % of actual value (I7, I8), ± 0.12 V
Conversion time, analog/
digital
Debounce ON: 20 ms
Debounce OFF: every cycle
Input current at 10 V DC 1 mA 1 mA
Cable length (shielded) 30 m 30 m
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
218 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3.7 Relay outputs
8.3.7.1 EASY512-..-R…, EASY618-..-RE/EASY719-..-R.., EASY202-RE
EASY512-…-R… EASY618-..-RE/
EASY719-..-R..
EASY202-RE
Number 4 6 2
Type of outputs Relay
In groups of 1 1 2
Parallel switching of outputs to
increase performance
Not permissible
Protection for an output relay Miniature circuit-breaker B16 or fuse 8 A (slow)
Potential isolation from power
supply, inputs
Yes
300 V AC (safe isolation)
600 V AC (basic isolation)
Mechanical lifespan
(Operations)
10 x 106
Contacts relays
Conventional therm. current 8 A (10 A UL)
Recommended for load > 500 mA, 12 V AC/DC
Protected against short-
circuit cos ϕ = 1
16 A characteristic B (B16) at 600 A
Short-circuit proof
cos ϕ = 0.5 to 0.7
16 A characteristic B (B16) at 900 A
Rated impulse withstand
voltage Uimp contact coil
6kV
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Rated operational voltage Ue 250 V AC
Safe isolation to EN 50178
between coil and contact
300 V AC
Safe isolation to EN 50178
between two contacts
300 V AC
Making capacity
AC-15 250 V AC, 3 A (600
Ops/h)
300000 operations
DC-13 L/R ≦ 150 ms 24 V DC,
1 A (500 S/h)
200000 operations
Breaking capacity
AC-15 250 V AC, 3 A (600
Ops/h)
300 000 operations
DC-13 L/R ≦ 150 ms 24 V DC,
1 A (500 S/h)
200 000 operations
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 219
8.3.7.2 UL/CSA
Filament bulb load 1000 W at 230/240 V AC/25000 operations
500 W at 115/120 V AC/25000 operations
Fluorescent tube with ballast 10 x 58 W at 230/240 V AC/25000 operations
Conventional fluorescent
tube, compensated
1 x 58 W at 230/240 V AC/25000 operations
Fluorescent tube,
uncompensated
10 x 58 W at 230/240 V AC/25000 operations
Operating frequency, relays
Mechanical switching
operations
10 million (1 x 107)
Mechanical switching
frequency
10 Hz
Resistive lamp load 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz
EASY512-…-R… EASY618-..-RE/
EASY719-..-R..
EASY202-RE
Continuous current at 240 V AC/24 V DC 10/8 A
AC Control Circuit Rating Codes
(Utilization category)
B300 Light Pilot Duty
Max. rated operational voltage 300 V AC
Max. thermal continuous current cos ϕ=1atB300 5 A
Maximum make/break capacity cos ϕ≠1 (NO/NC) at B300 3600/360 VA
DC Control Circuit Rating Codes
(Utilization category)
R300 Light Pilot Duty
Max. rated operational voltage 300 V DC
Max. thermal continuous current with R300 1 A
Maximum apparent On/off power with R300 28/28 VA
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
220 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.3.8 Transistor outputs
8.3.8.1 EASY-512-D.-T…, EASY620-DC-.E, EASY72…
EASY512-D.-T… EASY620-DC-.E, EASY72…
Number of outputs 4 8
Contacts Semiconductor Semiconductor
rated voltage Ue 24 V DC 24 V DC
permissible range 20.4 - 28.8 V DC 20.4 - 28.8 V DC
Ripple ≦ 5 % ≦ 5 %
Supply current
At signal “0” Normally 9 mA, ≦ 16 mA Normally 18 mA, ≦ 32 mA
At signal ”1” Normally 12 mA, ≦ 22 mA Normally 24 mA, ≦ 44 mA
Protection against polarity
reversal
yes, Caution! If voltage is applied to the outputs when the polarity of the supply
voltage is reversed, this will result in a short-circuit.
Potential isolation to mains
supply, inputs
Yes Yes
Rated operational current Ie
on "1" signal
≦ 0.5 A DC ≦ 0.5 A DC
Lamp load 5 Watts without RV 5 Watts without RV
Residual current on signal 0
per channel
< 0.1 mA < 0.1 mA
Max. output voltage
On "0" signal
with ext. load , 10 MV
2.5 V 2.5 V
On “1” signal, Ie = 0.5 A U = Ue – 1 V U = Ue – 1 V
Short-circuit protection Yes, thermal (analysis via diagnostics input I16, I15; R16, R15)
Short-circuit tripping
current for Ra ≦10 mΩ
0.7 A ≦ Ie ≦ 2 A per output
Max. total short-circuit
current
8 A 16 A
Peak short-circuit current 16 A 32 A
Thermal cutout Yes Yes
Max. switching frequency
with constant resistive load
RL ,100 kO: operations/hour
40000 (depends on program and load)
Parallel connection of
outputs with a resistive load;
inductive load with external
suppressor
(see page 46 ); combination
within one group
Group 1: Q1 - Q4 • Group 1:
Q1 - Q4, S1 - S4
• Group 2:
Q5 - Q8, S5 - S8
8 Appendix
8.3 Technical data
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 221
Inductive load (without external suppressor circuit)
General explanations:
T0.95 = time in milliseconds until 95 % of the stationary current is reached.
Utilization category in groups for:
•Q1 to Q4,
•Q5 to Q8,
•S1 to S4,
•S5 to S8.
Number of outputs ≦ 4 ≦ 4
total maximum current 2.0 A, Caution! Outputs must be actuated simultaneously and for the same time
duration.
Status indication of the
outputs
LCD display (if provided)
T0.95 ≈ 3 x T0.65 = 3 x L
R
T0.95 = 1 ms
R = 48 Ω
L = 16 mH
Utilization factor g = 0.25
Relative duty factor % 100
Maximum switching frequency f = 0.5
Hz
Maximum duty factor DF = 50 %
Operations/h 1500
DC13
T0.95 = 72 ms
R = 48 Ω
L = 1.15 H
Utilization factor g = 0.25
Relative duty factor % 100
Maximum switching frequency f = 0.5
Hz
Maximum duty factor DF = 50 %
Operations/h 1500
Other inductive loads:
T0.95 = 15 ms
R = 48 Ω
L = 0.24 H
Utilization factor g = 0.25
Relative duty factor % 100
Maximum switching frequency f = 0.5
Hz
Maximum duty factor DF = 50 %
Operations/h 1500
Inductive load with external suppressor circuit for each load (see section “Connecting transistor outputs” on )
Utilization factor g = 1
Relative duty factor % 100
max. operating frequency
Max. duty factor
Operations/h Depending on the
suppressor circuit
EASY512-D.-T… EASY620-DC-.E, EASY72…
8 Appendix
8.4 List of the function relays
222 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.4 List of the function relays
8.4.1 Usable contacts
Switching contact N/O N/C easy500 easy700 Page
Analog value comparator function
relay
AAA1…A16 A1…A16 82
Counter function relays CSA CC1…C16 C1…C16 94
Text display function relay D D1…D16 D1…D16 109
weekly timer function relays ÖöÖ1?Ö8Ö1?Ö8113
easy input terminal III1…I8 I1…I12 66
0 signal I13 I13
Expansion status –I14 194
Short-Circuit/Overload I16 I15…I16 192
Markers, (auxiliary relay) MMM1…M16 M1…M16 72
Markers (auxiliary relay) N N1…N16 N1…N16
Operating Hours Counter O O1…O4 O1…O4 118
Cursor button PPP1…P4 P1…P4 70
easy output q?Q1…Q4 Q1…Q8 66
Input terminal for expansion unit R–R1…R12 66
Short-circuit/overload with
expansion
R–R15…R16 192
easy output (expansion or S
auxiliary marker)
CSA S1…S8
(as marker)
S1…S8 72
Timer function relays TTT1…T16 T1…T16 122
Jump label :–:1…:8 :1…:8 135
Year Time Switch Y Y1…Y8 Y1…Y8 137
Master reset, (central reset) Z Z1…Z3 Z1…Z3 147
D
N
O
R
R
S
Y
Z
8 Appendix
8.4 List of the function relays
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 223
8.4.2 Available function relays
8.4.3 Names of relays
Relay easy
display
easy500 easy700 Coil
function
Parameters
Analog value comparator function
relay
CSA A1…A16 A1…A16 –✓
Counter function relays C C1…C16 C1…C16 ✓ ✓
Text marker function relay D D1…D16 D1…D16 ✓ ✓
weekly timer function relays Ö Ö1?Ö8Ö1?Ö8–✓
Markers (auxiliary relay) M M1…M16 M1…M16 ✓–
Markers (auxiliary relay) N N1…N16 N1…N16 ✓–
Operating Hours Counter O O1…O4 O1…O4 ✓ ✓
easy output relays q Q1…Q4 Q1…Q8 ✓–
easy output relay expansion,
auxiliary markers
S S1…S8
(as marker)
S1…S8 ✓–
Timer function relays T T1…T16 T1…T16 ✓ ✓
Conditional Jump : :1…:8 :1…:8 ✓–
Year Time Switch Y Y1…Y4 Y1…Y4 –✓
Master reset, (central reset) Z Z1…Z8 Z1…Z8 ✓–
Relay Meaning of abbreviation Function relay designation Page
AAnalog value comparator Analog value comparator 82
Ccounter Counter 94
Ddisplay Text Display 109
Ö(week, Software) Weekly timer 113
Ooperating time Operating Hours Counter 118
Ttiming relays Timing Relay 122
Yyear Year Time Switch 137
Zzero reset, Master Reset 147
8 Appendix
8.5 Compatibility of the function relay parameters
224 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
8.4.4 Names of function relay
8.4.5 Name of function block inputs
(constants, operands)
8.5 Compatibility of the function relay parameters
The function relays of the easy400 and easy600 devices have been
transferred to the easy500 and easy700 with enhanced functions. The
parameter displays were adapted for the additional functions.
8.5.1 Parameter display of analog value comparator
Function
relay coil
Meaning of abbreviation Description
Ccount input Counter input, counter
Ddirection input Counter direction, counter
H hold, stop Stopping of timing relay, stop, timing relay
Rreset Reset of actual value to zero, operating hours counters, counters,
text displays, timing relays
Ttrigger Timing coil, timing relay
Input Meaning of abbreviation Description
F1 Factor 1Gain factor for I1 (I1 = F1 x Value)
F2 Factor 2Gain factor for I2 (I2 = F2 x Value)
HY Hysteresis Switching hysteresis for value I2 (Value HY applies to positive
and negative hysteresis.)
DDay Day
I1 Input 11st setpoint, comparison value
I2 Input 22nd setpoint, comparison value
SSetpoint Setpoint, limit value
easy400, easy600
parameters
easy500, easy700
parameters
AA =I1 AA
BB =I2 BB
A1 =A1
+=+
>=GE
ANALOG
AAw g
n > dA1
BByb +
A1 GE +
I1 AA Æ
F1 +0
I2 BB æ
F2 +0
OS +0
HY +0
8 Appendix
8.5 Compatibility of the function relay parameters
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 225
8.5.2 Parameter display of counters
8.5.3 Parameter display of weekly timer
8.5.4 Parameter display of timing relay
8.5.5 Compatibility of memory cards
easy400, easy600
parameters
easy500, easy700
parameters
AAAA =S AAAAA
=
C1 =C1
+=+
fAAAAg
Ä sDIR n
Ä sCNT d C1
Ä yRES b +
C1 N +
S AAAAA
easy400, easy600
parameters
easy500, easy700
parameters
Ö1 =Ö1
AA-BB =AA-BB
A =A
ON --:-- =ON --:--
OFF --:-- =OFF --:--
+ =+
fAA-BBg
n dÖ1
ON s--:--n A
OFFy--:--b +
Ö1 A +
D AA-BB
ON --:--
OFF --:--
easy400, easy600
parameters
easy500, easy700
parameters
T1 =T1
X =X
S=
S
AA.BB =AA.BB
+ =+
X w g
SnAA.BBn
Ä sTRG dT1
yRES b+
T1 X S +
I1 AA.BB
I2
Type of
memory card
easy500 easy700
Reading Writing Reading Writing
M-8K ✓–✓–
M-16K – – ✓–
M-32K ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8 Appendix
8.5 Compatibility of the function relay parameters
226 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
9 Glossary of terms
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 227
9 Glossary of terms
Analog input The device easy-AB, easy-DA and easy-DC are provided with the two
(easy500) and four (easy700) analog inputs I7, I8 and I11,I12. The input
voltages are between 0 V and 10 V. The measuring data is evaluated with the
integrated function relays.
Output You can connect various loads to the four easy outputs, such as contactors,
lamps or and motors. In the easy circuit diagram the outputs are controlled via
the corresponding output relay coils Q1 to Q8 or S1 to S8.
Operator buttons easy has eight operating buttons. These are used to select menu functions and
create circuit diagrams. The large round button in the middle is used to move
the cursor.
DEL, ALT, ESC and OK all perform additional functions.
Operating Mode easy has two operating modes: RUN and STOP. RUN mode is used to process
your circuit diagram (with the controller running continuously). In STOP mode
you can create your circuit diagrams.
Remote expansion I/O expansion with the expansion unit (e.g. EASY620-DC-TE) installed up to
30 m away from the basic unit. The EASY200-EASY coupling unit is fitted to
the basic unit. The input and output data is exchanged between expansion and
basic unit via a two-wire cable.
Entry mode Entry mode is used to input or modify values. when creating circuit diagrams or
setting parameters, for example.
Input The inputs are used to connect up external contacts. In the circuit diagram,
inputs are evaluated via contacts I1 to I12 and R1 to R12.
easy-AB, easy-DA and easy-DC can also receive analog data via the inputs I7,
I8 and I11, I 12.
Function Relays Function relays can be used for complex control tasks. easy features the
following function relays:
•Timing relay,
•Week time switch,
•Year time-switch,
•Counter, up/down, high-speed, frequency,
•Analog value comparator/threshold value switch,
•Operational time counter,
•Master reset,
•Text.
Contact behavior The contact behavior of any circuit element can be defined as either a break
contact or a make contact. Break contact elements are identified by a line
above the identifier (Exception: jump).
Retentive data See Retention.
Parameters Parameters enable the user to set the behavior of function relays. The relevant
parameters apply for switch times or counter setpoints. They are set in the
parameter display.
9 Glossary of terms
228 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
P Buttons The P buttons can be used to simulate four additional inputs which are
controlled directly by the four cursor buttons, rather than via external contacts.
The switch contacts of P buttons are connected up in the circuit diagram.
Retention Data is retained even after the easy relay power supply is switched off.
(retentive data)
The following data is retentive:
•easy circuit diagram,
•Parameters, setpoint values,
•Texts,
•System settings,
•Password,
•Actual values of marker relays, timing relays, counters (selectable).
Circuit diagram
elements
As in conventional wiring, the circuit diagram is made up of circuit elements.
These include input, output and marker relays, plus function relays and P
buttons.
Interface The serial multifunction interface is used to exchange and save circuit
diagrams to a memory card or PC.
Each memory card contains one circuit diagram and its associated easy
settings.
The programming software easySoft-Basic or
easySoft -Pro programming software enables easy to be controlled from the
PC. Which is connected using the easy-PC-CAB programming cable or
EASY-USB-CAB.
Power supply easy-AB is supplied with an 24 V AC supply. The terminals are labeled with "L"
and "N".
easy-AC is powered by AC voltage at 85 to 264 V AC, 50/60 Hz. The terminals
are labeled with "L" and "N".
easy-DA is powered by DC voltage at 12 V DC. The terminals are labeled
“+12 V” and “0 V”.
easy-DC is powered by DC voltage at 24 V DC. The terminals are labeled
“+24 V” and “0 V”.
The terminals for the power feed are the first three terminals on the input side.
Memory card The memory card is used to store your easy circuit diagram, together with its
parameter and easy settings. The data on the memory card will be retained,
even if the power supply fails or is switched off.
The memory card is inserted into the interface slot on the easy device.
Rung Each line in the circuit diagram is a rung. easy500 and easy700 can take
128 rungs.
9 Glossary of terms
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 229
Impulse relays An impulse relay is a relay which changes its switching state and retains its
new state (latched) when a voltage is applied to the relay coil for a short time.
Connect mode Connect mode is used to wire up the circuit elements in your easy circuit
diagram.
Local expansion I/O expansion with the expansion unit (e.g. EASY620-DC-TE) installed directly
on the basic unit. The connector is always supplied with the expansion unit.
9 Glossary of terms
230 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 231
Index
A
Accuracy of real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Actual values, deleting retentive . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Add rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Analog
Comparing two values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 227
Input Power supply, Input
analog, Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Input, resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setpoint potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Value comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
value comparator parameter compatibility .224
Value comparator, two-step controller . . . . 92
AND circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Annual timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Auxiliary Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Auxiliary relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
B
Basic circuit
Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Negation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Parallel circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Permanent contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Series circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Break contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 222
Bus system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Button
ALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 59
Buttons for circuit diagram processing . . . . . . . 59
C
Cable cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cable lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Card startup
card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Change channel (annual timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Change channel (weekly timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Change language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Circuit diagram
Coil field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Contact fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Creation, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 64
easy operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fast entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 64
Internal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 195, 199
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 195, 199
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 71
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 68
Circuit examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Clock backup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Coil field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Coil function
Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Impulse relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Latching relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Comparator functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Comparison
“Equal to” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
“Greater than” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
“Greater than/equal to” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
“Less than” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
“Less than/equal to” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Two analog values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Compatibility of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Connect mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
232 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
Connecting
20 mA sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
analog setpoint potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Brightness sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bus system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Contactors and relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Digital input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Frequency encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
High-speed counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Neon bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Proximity switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Pushbuttons and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Transistor outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting brightness sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting frequency encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting setpoint potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connecting transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connection cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connection of the L phase conductor and
neutral conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Connections
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Position in the circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 66
Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
List all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Contactor function, invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 97, 98, 100
Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Component quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Counter frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
fast, circuit diagram evaluation . . . . . . . . . . 188
High-speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 103
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Operating time/hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
parameter compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Retentive actual value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Scan for actual value = zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Counter relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105
Counter value automatic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Counting unit quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Current
Increasing input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
current
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36, 37
Cursor buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 70
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
see „P buttons“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Cursor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 59
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cycle pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75, 154
D
Date setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Delay times
for easy-AB, easy-DA, easy-DC . . . . . . . . . 191
for easy-AC, easy-AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
of easy-DA and easy-DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Deleting retentive actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Detecting operating states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Device version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Display and operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
DST setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 233
E
easy at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
geasy at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
easySoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 200
easySoft-Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
easySoft-Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Edge
Evaluate falling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Evaluate rising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Falling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electrical isolation, between basic device
and expansion device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . 211
Entry mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Error handling
see „What happens If“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
expanding easy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Expansion
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
detecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Transfer behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Expansion Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
F
Fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Frequency counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Function block inputs, list of names . . . . . . . . . 224
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Function relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 109, 118
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
High-speed counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
list of the names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
time switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Timing relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Function Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 227
Function relays
List all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Master reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Time switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
H
High-speed counter
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Hours-run meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
I
Improper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Impulse relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Impulse relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 229
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
analog connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Analog resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36, 37
Debounce setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Digital connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Expanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Voltage range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36, 37
Inrush current limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Insulation resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 228
Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
J
Jumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
K
Key to part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
234 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
L
Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Latching relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
List
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Function relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
M
Main menu
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maintenance meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Marker reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Master reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 197, 228
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Menu
Change language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Changing level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Selecting main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Message
INVALID PROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 204
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Mode
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Monitoring expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Screwing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Top-hat rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
N
N/C contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
N/O contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 62, 222
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NAND circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Neon bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Non-volatile data (retention) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
NOT circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
O
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 59
Operator buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
OR circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connecting relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connecting transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Expanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
overload
monitoring with EASY..-D.-T.. . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
P
P buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
see “Cursor buttons” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Parameter
Block access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Change switch time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Function relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
power flow display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Parameter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Timing relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Password
Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Deactivating, see “Unlock easy” . . . . . . . . 165
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Remove protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Permissible markers and function relays . . . . . 182
Placing into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com 235
Power Flow Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Power flow display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
power flow display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 228
Power supply, analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
pulse shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
R
Real-time clock backup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Real-time clock, accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Reed relay contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Output, Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Relay coil
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Coil function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 72
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Relays
Contactor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Impulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
List all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reset counter value manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Reset markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Reset, master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Response time Input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 182, 228
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Retentive behavior
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Transferring the circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . 183
RUN, start behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RUN/STOP switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Add new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
S
scaled analog values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Screw mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sensor (20 mA)
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Setting summer time rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Setting the cycle time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Shift Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Short-circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
monitoring with EASY..-D.-T.. . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Signals, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Stairwell lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Star-delta starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Startup behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 180
After deleting circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Default setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180
Possible faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Upload/download to card or PC . . . . . . . . . 179
Status image register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Status indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Supply voltage
Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switch contact
Cursor buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Switching contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Contact number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Contacting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
switching contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
System menu selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
236 Operating instructions 05/10 MN05013003Z-EN www.eaton.com
T
Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Text display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Analog Value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Entering a setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Threshold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Time switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
annual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Change channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 139
examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Weekly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Timeout Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Timing relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Off-delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
On- and off-delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
On delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
parameter compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Pulse shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Time range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Top-hat rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transfer behavior Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Transfer cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Transistor output, Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Troubleshooting
During circuit diagram creation . . . . . . . . . 204
With result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Two way circuit
Changeover circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Two-step controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Two-wire proximity switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
U
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
use, improper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
V
Value entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Voltage range, Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36, 37
W
Week time switch
parameter compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Weekday setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
What happens If . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Wiring rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
X
XOR connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Y
Year time switch
Behavior in the event of a power failure . . 138
Configuring the parameters for
continuous periods of time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configuring the parameters for
recurring intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Entry rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Sample parameter configurations . . . 115, 142
